Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Service Guide 2105 Models 750/800 and Expansion Enclosure Volume 2 Chapters 4, 5, and 6
SY27-7636-05
Service Guide 2105 Models 750/800 and Expansion Enclosure Volume 2 Chapters 4, 5, and 6
SY27-7636-05
Note Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under Notices on page xix.
Sixth Edition (November 2005) This edition replaces SY27-7636-04 This edition applies to the first release of the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server and to all following releases and changes until otherwise indicated in new editions. Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality. Publications are not stocked at the address given below. IBM welcomes your comments. A form for readers comments may be supplied at the back of this publication, or you may mail your comments to the following address: International Business Machines Corporation Information Develpment Department 61C 9000 South Rita Road Tucson, AZ 85775-4401 U.S.A. When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes suitable without incurring any obligation to you. Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2004, 2005. All rights reserved. US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laser Safety and Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translated Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement . . . . . . Industry Canada Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . European Community Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Korean Ministry of Information and Communication (MIC) Statement . Taiwan Class A Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . Chinese Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using This Service Guide . . . . Where to Start . . . . . . . . . Limited Vocabulary . . . . . . . Publications . . . . . . . . . TotalStorage ESS Product Library Ordering Publications . . . . . Web Sites . . . . . . . . . Other Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix xix xix xix xix xx xx xx xx xx xx xxi xxi xxii xxii xxii
. . . . . . . .
Chapter 4: FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . Entry for Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDM Bay FRU Replacement Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . CEC Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . I/O Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . Host Bay FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Repair Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . Using the Repair Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Tools Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Attach the ESD Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESD Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a FRU Using the Service Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Non-Cluster FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Cluster FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDM BAY FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . . Disk Drive Module Locations, DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . SSA Disk Drive Module Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay . . . . Bypass and Passthrough Card Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay Controller Card Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay . . . . . .
Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 . . . 11 . . . 13
iii
Frame Assembly Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . 14 DDM BAY SSA CABLE FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . 17 SSA Cable Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . 17 CLUSTER CEC DRAWER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . 20 Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . 20 CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . 23 CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . 25 CEC Drawer Operator Panel and EEPROM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 CD-ROM and Hard Disk Drive Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Planar Assembly, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 CEC Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 41 CEC Processor Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800. . . . . 44 Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Memory Riser Card, Memory DIMM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Drawer Fan Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . 51 Drawer Fan Controller and LED Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . 56 CLUSTER I/O DRAWER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . 61 Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . 61 I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . 64 I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . 66 Diskette Drive Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer 67 I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . . . . 72 I/O Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . 78 SSA Device Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer 81 NVS/IOA Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . 85 NVS Battery Charger Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 NVS Battery Assembly Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Fan Controller Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer 96 RIO Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . 98 RJ45 Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . 102 Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . 105 HOST BAY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . 109 Host Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . 111 Host Bay Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . 114 Host Bay Drawer Backplane Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 116 ESCON and Fibre Channel Wrap Tools, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . 118 Host Bay Planar Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . 120 2105 Model 800 and EXPANSION ENCLOSURE FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Rack, Subsystem Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Primary Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Mainline Power Cable Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
iv
Primary Power Supply Fan Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 V Battery Set Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Panel Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack Power Control Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 RPC Switch Card (Local and Remote) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Power Control Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Cage Fan (Top) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Cage Fan (Center) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Cage Power Planar Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5: Install and Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and Testing the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . 2105 Model 800 Installation Process and Checkpoints . . . Installation With Multiple Service Representatives . . . . Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . Begin the Physical Install of the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . Checking the Customer Power . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings . . . . . . Setting 390 V Battery and Primary Power Supplies to On . . How to Power on and Test the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . Installing the 2105 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal . Complete the Physical Install of the 2105 . . . . . . . . . Begin Installation and Connection to the ESSNet . . . . . Configuring the Master Console . . . . . . . . . . . . Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Service Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Home Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster . . . Connect the 2105 to the Ethernet Hub and Configure Cluster Console IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Master Console Network Setup . . . . . . Master Console Backup and Restore Configuration Data . . Configuring the 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SIM Reporting Options (System/390 only) . . . Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count . . Enable or Disable ESS Specialist . . . . . . . . . . Configure Call Home and Remote Services . . . . . . . Configure E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Pager Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 133 . 135 . 139 140 . 143 147 . 148 . 150 . 151 . 153 . 157 . 159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 162 163 165 166 174 177 202 206 207 218 220 220 231 231 231 231 232 232 233 234 237 238 239 239 239 239 239 239 241 242 242
Contents
Configure Fibre Channel Port Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an ESSNet1 or Master Console to a Customer Network . . . . Master Console Configuration for Customer Network . . . . . . . . 2105 Cluster Configuration for the Customer Network . . . . . . . . Verify Cluster IP Address on the Master Console . . . . . . . . . . Connect and Test the Customer Network Connection . . . . . . . . Testing Customer E-Mail and SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Modem Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating LIC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Required Microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation of the 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certify DDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA . . . Finish the Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish the Install (Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and Testing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure MES . . . . . . . . . . . . Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure with 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . How to Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 2105 Expansion Enclosure Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Customer Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Power on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and Test the Installation Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Using the Service Terminal . . . Complete the Physical Install of the 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation . . . . . Tailgate Hardware Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . Cluster SCSI and Communication Cable Tailgate Clamps . . . . . . . Cluster Fibre Channel and ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps . . . . . . Installing a DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a DDM Bay for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Rack for Drawer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinstalling the Disk Drive Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal . . . . . Continuing the Installation of a DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation of a DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . 2105 Model 800 DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970 . . . . . . . . . Installing DDM Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2105 Expansion Enclosure DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970 . . . . . Installing DDM Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Host Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation of a Host Card . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Host Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Considerations when Moving a 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . Determine if Shipping Containers are Required? . . . . . . . . . . Determine Configuration and Racks Being Moved . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
242 243 243 244 245 246 247 248 248 249 250 250 251 252
. 253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 257 258 259 261 264 264 264 266 272 273 305 309 309 310 316 316 318 322 330 330 331 334 336 336 339 341 343 343 347 347 350 355 359 363 363 363 364
vi
Check the Customer Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Considerations when Moving a 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repairing Existing Problems Using the Service Terminal . . . . . . . Powering Off the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinstall the Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Jumper Cable . . . . . . . . Disconnect Mainline Power Cables from Rack Being Moved . . . . . . Disconnect Control and Interface Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure Frames Moving the 2105 Model 800 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Relocated 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure Subsystem Reinstallation of a 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status . . . . . . Master Console Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem . . . . . . . . Source ESS Subsystem Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capture the Source ESS Subsystem Configuration . . . . . . . . . Target ESS Subsystem Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicate the Configuration on the Target ESS Subsystem . . . . . . Chapter 6: Logical Configuration of Storage Facility . . . Pre-Installation Configuration Worksheets . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filling in fields on the Communications Resources Worksheet Activating LIC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Configuration of the 2105 . . . . . . . . Configure Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SIM Reporting Options (System/390 only) . . . Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count . . Configure Call Home / Remote Services . . . . . . . . Configure E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Pager Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure ESS Specialist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Fibre Channel Port Topology . . . . . . . . Configure Control Switches Configuration. . . . . . . . Additional Configuration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . Change Date, Time, and Time Zone . . . . . . . . . Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Dual Cluster Version) . . . Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Single Cluster Version) . . Updating the Master Console TCP/IP Information . . . . . Regenerate ESS Specialist Certificate . . . . . . . . . Configure Copy Services, With DNS . . . . . . . . . Configure Copy Services, Without DNS . . . . . . . . Change/Show Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . Enable or Disable CUIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Passwords on the Master Console . . . . . . Master Console Queue Management . . . . . . . . . . Master Console PE Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Console Offload User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364 364 365 365 368 368 369 374 376 377 377 386 386 388 388 391 391 392 392 393 395 395 395 396 396 397 397 397 397 397 398 399 399 399 400 400 400 401 401 401 405 409 410 410 412 415 415 415 416 417 418
vii
viii
Tables
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. DDM Bay FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 CEC Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 I/O Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Host Bay FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Rack FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Cluster CEC drawer Cable and Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Cluster I/O Drawer Cable and Connector Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Install and Remove Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 2105 Model 800 Install Without ISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 2105 Model 800 Install With ISA Using the Background Certify and Build Logical Config from ISA Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Multiple SR Installation Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Checking the Customers Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Three-Phase AC Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Three-Phase AC Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . 211 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 212 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 213 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . 213 2105 Model 800 Primary Power Supply PPS Good Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Default TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Begin Install of the Master Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Begin Install of the Master Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 2105 Model 800 Recommended Ethernet Hub Connection Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 228 2105 Model 800 Recommended Ethernet Hub Connection Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Install Completion Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Logical Configuration will be not be performed by SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Logical Configuration Import from ISA Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Logical Configuration using ESS Specialist or Copy Services Duplication . . . . . . . . . . 252 Before You Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Checking the Customers Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Three-Phase AC Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Three-Phase AC Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators . . . . . . . . 307 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators . . . . . . . . 307 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . 308 2105 Expansion Enclosure Primary Power Supply PPS Good Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 308
ix
DDM Bay Physical Installation Sequence . . . DDM Bay Physical Installation Sequence for Each Default TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . Default TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . Control Switch Activation Reboot Requirements . Master Console Launcher Passwords . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Figures
1. Chinese EMI Statement (s009679) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii 2. Disk Drive Module Locations in a DDM bay (S007706l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3. Disk Drive Module Check Indicator (S007715m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 4. Drive Removal (S007718m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5. Disk Drive Removal (S007719m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6. Placing a DDM in a Safe Position (S007720m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7. Disk Drive Module Replacement (S007721m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8. Drive Module Installation (S007722m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 9. Drive Lock Installation (S007723m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 10. DDM bay Bypass and Passthrough Card Locations (S007732l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11. Bypass and Passthrough Card Removal (S007733l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 12. DDM bay Bypass Card Jumper Settings (S008524l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13. DDM bay Controller Card Removal (S007735l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 14. DDM Bay Frame Assembly Location (S007731l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 15. DDM bay Serial Number Plate Location (s009541) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 16. DDM Bay Locations (s009540) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 17. 2105 Model 800 Cluster SSA Device Card Connectors (s009166) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 18. DDM bay SSA Connectors (S007693l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 19. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009294) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 20. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 21. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 22. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 23. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009229) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 24. CEC Drawer Top Cover Removal (s009230) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 25. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 26. CEC Drawer Operator Panel Location (s009232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 27. CEC Drawer Operator Panel Removal (s009231) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 28. CEC Drawer Operator Panel VPD Module Swap (s009233) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 29. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 30. 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer Drive Locations (s009265) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 31. CEC Drawer Drive Mounting Screws (s009266) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 32. CEC Drawer Drive Removal (s009267). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 33. CD-ROM Drive Jumpers (s009268) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 34. CEC Drawer Drive Removal (s009269). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 35. Hard Disk Drive Jumpers (s009464) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 36. New 18 GB Hard Disk Drive Jumpers (s009709) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 37. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 38. CEC Drawer Planar Assembly Locations (s009295) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 39. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009251) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 40. CEC Processor and Memory Card Locations (s009270) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 41. CEC Drawer Locations (s009271) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 42. CEC Drawer Locations (s009272) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 43. CEC Drawer Locations (s009273) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 44. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 45. CEC Drawer Power Supply Cable Arm Locations (s009465) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 46. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009281) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 47. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 48. CEC Drawer, Processor Card Location (s009255) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 49. CEC Drawer, Processor Card Location (s009296) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 50. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 51. CEC Drawer, Memory Riser Card Locations (s009256) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 52. CEC Drawer, Memory Riser Card Locations (s009297) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 53. 2105 Model 800 Cluster CEC Drawer Locations (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005
xi
54. 2105 Model 800 Memory Riser Card Memory DIMM Locations (s009241) . 55. Memory DIMM Removal (S008408m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56. Memory DIMM Installation (S008409m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009235) . . . . . . . . . . . 58. Cluster CEC Drawer Fan Removal (s009283) . . . . . . . . . . . 59. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60. Cluster, CEC Drawer Fan Controller and LED Card Locations (s009240) . 61. CEC Fan Controller Card Removal (s009278) . . . . . . . . . . . 62. CEC LED Card Removal (s009277) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63. CEC Cable Locations (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 1 (s009274) . . . . . 65. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 2 (s009275) . . . . . 66. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 3 (s009276) . . . . . 67. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009294) . . . . . . . . . . . 68. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228) . . . . . . . . . . . 69. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228) . . . . . . . . . . . 70. I/O Drawer Service Position (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71. I/O Drawer Service Position (s009302) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72. I/O Drawer Top Cover Removal (s009303) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74. I/O Drawer Diskette Drive Location (s009304) . . . . . . . . . . . 75. I/O Drawer Diskette Drive Location (s009480) . . . . . . . . . . . 76. I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Location (s009284) . . . . . . . 77. I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Location (s009299) . . . . . . . 78. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79. 2105 Model 800 Cluster I/O Drawer Locations (s009300) . . . . . . . 80. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009394) . . . . . . . . . . . 81. I/O Drawer Locations (s009525) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82. I/O Drawer Card Locations (s009397) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83. I/O Drawer Locations (s009523) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84. I/O Drawer Locations (s009524) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009301) . . . . . . . . . . . 86. I/O Drawer Power Supply Cable Arm Locations (s009466) . . . . . . 87. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009282) . . . . . . . . . . . 88. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89. SSA Device Card Locations (s009181) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009310) . . . . . . . . . 91. SSA Card Locations (s009472) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93. NVS/IOA Card Locations (s009309) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009310) . . . . . . . . . 95. NVS/IOA Card Locations (s009473) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97. NVS Battery Charger Card Removal (s009313) . . . . . . . . . . 98. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009311) . . . . . . . . . 99. NVS Battery Charger Card Locations (s009474) . . . . . . . . . . 100. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009314) . . . . . . . . . . . . 102. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009475) . . . . . . . . . . . . 103. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009476) . . . . . . . . . . . . 104. Date of First Charge Label Location (s009552) . . . . . . . . . . . 105. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106. Cluster, I/O Drawer Fan Controller Card Locations (s009467) . . . . . 107. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108. RIO Card Removal (s009259) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109. RIO Card Locations (s009520) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 50 . 50 . 51 . 52 . 53 . 54 . 54 . 55 . 56 . 57 . 58 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 63 . 64 . 65 . 65 . 66 . 67 . 68 . 69 . 70 . 71 . 73 . 73 . 74 . 75 . 76 . 77 . 78 . 79 . 80 . 81 . 82 . 83 . 84 . 85 . 86 . 86 . 87 . 88 . 89 . 90 . 91 . 92 . 93 . 93 . 94 . 95 . 96 . 97 . 97 . 99 . 99 . . . . . . . . . 100
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
110. RIO Card Locations (s009519) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111. RIO Card Locations (s009521) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113. I/O Drawer RJ45 Card Locations (s009316) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114. RJ45 Card Locations (s009481) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116. Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Connector Locations (s009598) . . . . . . . . . . . . 117. Host Bay Locations (s009455) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118. CPI Cable Routing (s009645) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119. Host Bay and Card Locations (s009482) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120. Removing Host Card from Host Bay (s009550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121. CPI Cable Routing (s009649) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122. Host Bay Power Supply Locations (s009264) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123. Host Bay Power Supply Locations (s009435) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124. Host Bay Drawer Backplane Locations (s009581) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125. Host Bay Drawer Backplane Locations (s009580) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126. Host Bay and ESCON Card Locations (s009456) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127. Host Bay Locations (s009139) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128. Host Bay CPI Cable Connector Locations (s009551) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129. Host Bay Card and Planar Locations (s009463) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130. CPI Cable Routing (s009650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Locations (s009395) . . . . . . . . . . . . 132. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134. 2105 Low-/High-Voltage Primary Power Supply Identification (s009542) . . . . . . . 135. Primary Power Supply Locations (S009442) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136. PPS Line Cord Bracket (S009443) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137. PPS Line Cord Bracket (s009543) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138. PPS Mounting Hardware Locations (s009544) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139. PPS Micro-Processor Switch Location (s009545) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140. Mainline Power Cable Locations (S009444) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141. Primary Power Supply Locations (S009445) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142. Primary Power Supply Fan Locations (s009446) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143. 390 V Battery Set Locations (s009447) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144. Cable Routing Bracket Removal (S008250m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145. PPS 1, 390 V Battery Set Connector (s009448) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146. Date of First Charge Label (S009205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147. Date of First Charge Label Location (s009582) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148. 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Removal (s009449) 149. Rack Power Control Card Locations (s009401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150. Rack Power Control Card Removal (s009402) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151. Rack Power Control Card Replacement (s009403) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152. RPC Switch Card Locations (s009398) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153. RPC Switch Card Cable Locations (s009457) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154. RPC Switch Card and Cover Removal (s009400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155. RPC Switch Card Removal (s009458) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156. Remote Power Control Card (s009450) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157. Storage Cage Power Supply Locations (s009451) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158. Storage Cage Power Supply Locations (s009534) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159. Storage Cage Fan Locations (s009193) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160. Storage Cage Fan Replacement (s009549) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161. Storage Cage Fan (Center) Locations (s009194) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162. Storage Cage Fan (Center) Replacement (s009452) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164. Storage Cage Power Planar Locations (s009197) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165. Storage Cage Fan Plate Removal (s009453) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 110 111 112 113 114 115 115 117 118 119 121 121 122 123 123 124 125 126 127 128 128 129 131 132 132 134 135 136 137 138 138 140 141 142 142 144 145 145 146 147 148 149 151 151 152 153 154 155 156
Figures
xiii
166. Storage Cage Power Planar Removal (S008084m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167. Power Planar to DDM Bay Power Cable Access (s008085l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168. Power Planar to DDM Bay Power Cable Details (s009460) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169. Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Locations (s009454). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170. 2105 Model 800 Installation Process Flowchart (s009639) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172. Caster Wedge Chocks (S008406m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173. Top Hat Installation (s009553) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174. 2105 Model 800 Mainline Power Cable Installation (S009121) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009122) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177. Ground Continuity Check, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009626) . . . . . . . . 178. Male Plug on the Mainline Power Cable (s009633) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009628) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634) . . . . . . 181. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009629) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634) . . . . . . 183. Check the Three-Phase AC Power Cable Outlet, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009630) 184. Three Phase Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009635) 185. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009632 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009122) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189. Ground Continuity Check with Wired Mainline, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009405) 190. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009123) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009408) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195. Check the Three-Phase AC Power Cable, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009627) . . . 196. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009631) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009124) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201. Electronics and Storage Cage Power Supply Switches (s009169) . . . . . . . . . . . 202. Primary Power Supply Circuit Breaker Locations (S007627l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203. Rack Power Control Card Switch Locations (S009127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204. 2105 Model 800 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (s009128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205. Primary Power Supply (s009616) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009421) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009421) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209. CEC Drawer, I/O Drawer, and Host Bay Power Supply Indicators (s009209) . . . . . . . 210. Host Bay Power Supply Indicators (s009417) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211. Primary Power Supply (s009129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212. Accessing the Service Terminal Table (s009131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213. Cluster Connectors for Service Terminal (s009132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214. MSA and Modem Expander Attachment Diagram (s009415) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215. Multiport Serial Adapter Attachment Diagram (S009424) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
156 157 157 158 163 173 175 176 177 180 181 182 182
. 183 . 184 . 185 . 185 187 187 . . . . 189 189 191 192 193 . 194
. 195 . 196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 197 198 199 200 200 202 203 204 204 205 206 206 207 209 210 211 212 213 215 216 220 222
xiv
216. Modem Configuration Switch Settings (S007457l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217. Modem Rear View (s009711) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218. Modem Front Panel Locations (S008412l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219. Multiport Serial Adapter Top View (S009175) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220. Cluster to Modem Connectors (S009133) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221. Ethernet Hub Locations (s009615) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222. Cluster to Cluster Communication Cable Location (S009120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. Ethernet Hub Locations (s009615) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224. MSA and Modem Expander Diagram (s009415) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225. Cluster Connectors for Service Terminal (S009132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Locations (S009141) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (S009135) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228. Tailgate Cable Strain Relief Clamps (S009143) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229. Tailgate Cable Strain Relief Clamps (S009145) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230. RPC Card Local/Remote Switch Locations (S009146) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231. Storing the Service Terminal Table (S009144) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232. Installation of 2105 Rack Spacers (S008671q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233. Rack Spacer Service Panel Removal (S008672p) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Ground Strap Location (S008670m) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235. Caster Wedge Chocks (S009050) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236. Top Hat Installation (s009554) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237. Date of First Charge Label Location (S009205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238. 390 V Battery Locations (s009589) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Mainline Power Cable Installation (S008662m) . . . . . . . . 240. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008663m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242. Ground Continuity Check, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009626) . . . . . . . . 243. Male Plug on the Mainline Power Cable (s009633) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009628) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634) . . . . . . 246. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009629) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634) . . . . . . 248. Check the Three-Phase ac Power Cable Outlet, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009630) 249. Three-Phase Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009635) 250. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009632 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008663m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254. Ground Continuity Check with Wired Mainline, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009405) 255. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008661m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009408) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260. Check the Three-Phase ac Power Cable, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009627). . . . 261. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009631) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008664m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Operator Panel Locations (S008656m) . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222 223 225 225 227 229 234 236 244 249 254 256 257 259 260 261 268 269 270 270 271 272 272 273 276 277 278 278
. 279 . 280 . 281 . 281 283 283 . . . . 285 285 287 288 289 . 290
. 291 . 292 . . . . . . . . 293 293 294 295 296 296 298 299
Figures
xv
266. Storage Cage Power Supply Switches (s009535) . . . . . . . . . . . 267. Primary Power Supply Circuit Breaker Locations (S009051) . . . . . . . 268. Primary Power Interconnect Cable Installation (S009211) . . . . . . . . 269. 2105 Model 800 DDM bay Locations (S009136) . . . . . . . . . . . . 270. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . . . . . . 271. DDM Bay Short Cable SSA Connector Locations (s009608) . . . . . . . 272. Primary Power Supply (S009108) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273. 2105 Expansion Enclosure 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (S008667m) . . . 274. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Operator Panel Locations (S009420) . . . . . . 275. Primary Power Supply (S008668n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276. SSA DASD DDM Bay Indicators (S008021l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277. Location Codes for DDM bays in a 2105 Expansion Enclosure (S007741s) . . 278. Storing the Service Terminal Table (S009161) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (S009154) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280. 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Configurations (S009155) . . . . . . . . . . . 281. Tailgate Bar Removal (S009156) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282. Tailgate Clamp Removal (S008275n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283. SCSI Cable Grounding Braid Position in Tailgate (S008525m) . . . . . . . 284. Cluster SCSI Cable Tailgate Clamps (S009152) . . . . . . . . . . . . 285. Cluster Communication Cable Tailgate Clamps (S009151) . . . . . . . . 286. Cluster 1, Tailgate Cable and Cable Clamp Locations (S008270m) . . . . . 287. Cluster 2, Tailgate Cable and Cable Clamp Locations (S008271m) . . . . . 288. Cluster Fibre Channel or ESCON Cable Installation (S009153) . . . . . . 289. Tailgate Bar Removal (S009157) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290. ESCON and ESCON/fibre Strain Relief Hardware (S009012S) . . . . . . 291. ESCON Cable Strain Relief Hardware (S008276p) . . . . . . . . . . . 292. Fibre/ESCON Cable Strain Relief Cover Removal (S009014M) . . . . . . 293. Fibre/ESCON Cable Strain Relief Bracket Hardware (S009013M) . . . . . 294. Cluster Fibre/ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps (S008259p) . . . . . . . . 295. DDM Bay Installation Parts (S007694m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296. DDM Bay Air Door and Power Cable (S007697L) . . . . . . . . . . . 297. DDM Bay Front Power Cable Locations (s009349) . . . . . . . . . . . 298. DDM Bay Rear Power Cable Locations (s009350) . . . . . . . . . . . 299. DDM Bay Locations (s009555) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301. DDM Bay Card Locations (s009594) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302. Disk Drive Module Installation (S007701m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303. 2105 Model 800 SSA Loop Configurations (s009419) . . . . . . . . . . 304. 2105 Expansion Enclosure SSA Loop Configurations (s009346) . . . . . . 305. Cluster SSA Device Card Connector Locations (s009166) . . . . . . . . 306. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . . . . . . 307. DDM bay Indicator Locations (S007704l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308. R1- Location Codes for DDM Bays in a 2105 Model 800 (s009134) . . . . . 309. DDM Bay Storage Cage Air Door (s009555) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . . . . . . 312. DDM Bay Short Cable SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . 313. R2- Location Codes for DDM Bays in a 2105 Expansion Enclosure (s007741s) 314. DDM Bay Storage Cage Air Door (s009555) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . . . . . . 317. Locating a Host Bay (s009139) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318. Host Bay Card Locations (s009142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319. Host Card Installation Locations (s009351) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320. Host Card Installation Locations (s009557) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321. Host Bay Card Connectors Locations (s009142) . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
299 300 301 302 303 303 304 304 306 308 310 312 314 316 317 318 319 319 321 321 322 322 323 324 325 326 328 328 329 331 332 333 334 335 335 335 336 338 339 339 340 341 344 345 345 345 346 348 349 349 349 351 352 353 353 358
xvi
322. Locating a Host Bay (s009139) . . . . . . . . . . . . 323. Host Bay Card Locations (s009142) . . . . . . . . . . 324. Host Card Removal Locations (s009558) . . . . . . . . 325. Host Card Removal Locations (s009352) . . . . . . . . 326. Service Terminal Interface Connection (s009132) . . . . . 327. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Switch Locations (s009421) . 328. 350 Volt Battery Locations (s009159) . . . . . . . . . . 329. Primary Power Supply Locations (s009579) . . . . . . . 330. Primary Power Supply System Power CB Location (S008689l) 331. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . 332. Mainline Power Cable Locations (s009150). . . . . . . . 333. Rack Spacer Service Panel Removal (S008695p) . . . . . 334. Primary Power Supply Control Cable Locations (s009212) . . 335. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Ground Strap Location (S008696m) 336. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . 337. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (s009142) . . 338. Cluster Connector Locations (s009160) . . . . . . . . . 339. Caster Wedge Locks (S008406m) . . . . . . . . . . . 340. Installation of 2105 Rack Spacers (S008699q) . . . . . . 341. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Location (s009395) . . 342. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (s009142) . . 343. 2105 Model 800 DDM bay Locations (s009136) . . . . . . 344. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . 345. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . 346. Cluster Ethernet Connectors (s009132) . . . . . . . . . 347. ESSNet Hub Port Connector Locations (S008603p) . . . . 348. 2105 Model 800 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (s009128) . . 349. Primary Power Supply (s009616) . . . . . . . . . . . 350. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . 351. Service Terminal Interface Connection (s009132) . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360 361 362 362 365 366 366 367 367 368 369 370 371 372 372 373 374 374 375 378 379 380 381 381 382 383 384 384 385 386
Figures
xvii
xviii
Notices
References in this manual to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Subject to IBMs valid intellectual property or other legal protectable rights, any functionally equivalent product, program, or service may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 USA
Safety Notices
Safety notices are printed throughout this manual. Danger notices warn you of conditions or procedures that can result in death or severe personal injury. Caution notices warn you of conditions or procedures that can cause personal injury that is neither lethal nor extremely hazardous. Attention notices warn you of conditions or procedures that can cause damage to machines, equipment, or programs.
Environmental Notices
This section contains information about: v Product recycling for this product v Environmental guidelines for this product
xix
Product Recycling
This unit contains recyclable materials. These materials should be recycled where processing sites are available and according to local regulations. In some areas, IBM provides a product take-back program that ensures proper handling of the product. Contact your IBM representative for more information.
Product Disposal
This unit contains several types of batteries. Return all Pb-acid (lead-acid) batteries to IBM for proper recycling, according to the instructions received with the replacement batteries.
xx
Conformity with the Council Directive 73/23/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits is based on compliance with the following harmonized standard: EN60950.
Germany Only
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut Gesetz ueber die elektromagnetische Vertraeglichkeit von Geraeten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995. Dieses Geraet ist berechtigt, in Uebereinstimmung mit dem deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitaetszeichen - CE - zu fuehren. Der Aussteller der Konformitaetserklaeung ist die IBM Deutschland. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2: Das Geraet erfuellt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082-1 un EN 55022 Klasse A. EN 55022 Klasse A Geraete beduerfen folgender Hinweise: Nach dem EMVG: Geraete duerfen an Orten, fuer die sie nicht ausreichend entstoert sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministeriums fuer Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes fuer Post und Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen Stoerungen zu erwarten sind. (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs.4) Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig. Nach der EN 55022: Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstoerungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Massnahmen durchzufuehren und dafuer aufzukommen. Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen, sind die Geraete wie in den Handbuechern angegeben zu installieren und zu betreiben.
Notices
xxi
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both: AIX AS/400 DB2 DFSMS/MVS DFSMS/VM e (logo) Enterprise Storage Server Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 ESCON ES/9000 FICON FlashCopy IBM MVS MVS/ESA Netfinity NetVista NUMA-Q Operating System/400 OS/390 OS/400 RETAIN RS/6000 S/390 Seascape SP StorWatch System/360 System/370 System/390 TotalStorage
xxii
Versatile Storage Server VM/ESA VSE/ESA xSeries z/Architecture z/OS zSeries z/VM Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other counties, or both. Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other counties, or both. UNIX, is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Other company, product, and service names, may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Notices
xxiii
xxiv
Where to Start
Start all service actions at Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of the Volume 1. Note: 2105 Model 750 information v The 2105 Model 750 is fully supported by the service information in this manual when following guided procedures. However, the service information will only reference the 2105 Model 800. v The 2105 Model 750 supports limited configuration options when compared to the 2105 Model 800. For further information, reference the IBM TotalStorage ESS Introduction and Planning Guide (form number SC267246). Attention: When performing any service action on the IBM 2105 TotalStorage ESS, follow the directions given in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of the Volume 1, or from the service terminal. This ensures that you use the correct remove, replace, or repair procedure, including the correct power on/off procedure, for this machine. Failure to follow these instructions can cause damage to the machine and might or might not also cause an unexpected loss of access to customer data.
Limited Vocabulary
This manual uses a specific range of words so that the text can be understood by IBM service representatives in countries where English is not the primary language.
xxv
Publications
This section describes the TotalStorage ESS library and publications for related products. It also gives ordering information.
xxvi
v IBM TotalStorage ESS: S/390 Command Reference manual, SC26-7298 This publication describes the functions of the ESS and provides reference information, such as channel commands, sense bytes, and error recovery procedures for IBM S/390 and zSeries hosts. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: SCSI Command Reference manual, SC26-7297 This publication describes the functions of the ESS. It provides reference information, such as channel commands, sense bytes, and error recovery procedures for UNIX , IBM Application System/400 (AS/400), and eserver iSeries 400 hosts. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Subsystem Device Driver manual, SC26-7478 This publication describes how to use the IBM TotalStorage ESS Subsystem Device Driver (SDD) on open-systems hosts to enhance performance and availability on the ESS. SDD creates redundant paths for shared logical unit numbers. SDD permits applications to run without interruption when path errors occur. It balances the workload across paths, and it transparently integrates with applications. For information about the SDD, go to the following Web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/techsup/swtechsup.nsf/support/sddupdates/ v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Users Guide manual, SC26-7445 This guide provides instructions for setting up and operating the ESS and for analyzing problems. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Web Interface Users Guide manual, SC26-7448 This guide provides instructions for using the two ESS Web interfaces, ESS Specialist and ESS Copy Services. Note: No hardcopy manual is produced for this publication. However, a PDF file is available from the following Web site: www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/products/ess/refinfo.htm
Ordering Publications
All of the above publications are available on a CD-ROM that comes with the TotalStorage ESS. You can also order a hard copy of some of the publications. For additional CD-ROMs, order: v ESS Service Documents CD-ROM, SK2T-8822 v ESS Customer Documents CD-ROM, SK2T-8803
Web Sites
v IBM Storage home page: http://www.storage.ibm.com/ v IBM Enterprise Storage Server home page: http://www.ibm.com/storage/ess http://www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/product/refinfo.htm
xxvii
xxviii
Go to: Page 20 Page 23 Page 25 Page 26 Page 28 Page 35 Page 41 Page 44 Page 46 Page 48 Page 51
Repair
Table 2. CEC Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures (continued) CEC Drawer FRU: Fan Controller Card and LED Card CEC Drawer Cables Go to: Page 53 Page 56
Repair
Table 5. Rack FRU Replacement Procedures (continued) Rack FRU: Primary Power Supply Fan 390 V Battery Operator Panel Rack Power Control Card (RPC Card) RPC Switch Card Remote Power Control Card Storage Cage Power Supply Storage Cage Fan (center) Storage Cage Power Planar Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card ESCON and Fibre Tools Cables, Rack Go to: Page 133 Page 135 Page 139 Page 140 Page 143 Page 147 Page 148 Page 151 Page 153 Page 157 Page 118 Page 159
Repair
ESD
Attention: Always wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap properly connected to the ESD ground bracket when you service this machine. This prevents possible damage to the 2105 rack and DDM bay, and decreases any possible impact to customer operations. Following is a list of the ESD-sensitive parts in the 2105 rack. Always wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on or touch any of these parts. v All logic cards v All logic boards v All drawer FRUs v All DDM bay FRUs v Any cables connected to ESD-sensitive parts
ESD Precautions
To prevent damage when you work with ESD-sensitive parts, perform these instructions carefully. v Keep the ESD-sensitive part in a special ESD bag until you are ready to install the part into the machine. v Make the fewest possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of static electricity from clothing, fibers, carpets, and furniture. v If instructed to do so, switch off the machine power before you remove ESD-sensitive parts. v Just before touching the ESD-sensitive part, discharge to the machine any static electricity in your body by touching the metal frame or cover of the machine. If possible, keep one hand on the frame when you install or remove an ESD-sensitive part. v Never touch or work on any electronic circuits without wearing the ESD wrist strap. Touching the logic board pins without wearing the ESD wrist strap (for example, while counting the pins) can cause logic card failures. Touching the voltmeter leads when you measure board pins or cable connections can also cause ESD damage. v Do not place any ESD-sensitive parts on the machine cover or on a metal table because large metal objects can become discharge paths if they are not grounded. If you must set aside an ESD-sensitive part, first place it into the special ESD bag. v Prevent ESD-sensitive parts from being accidentally touched by other personnel such as service support representatives or customers. Reinstall all covers when you are not working on the machine. v If possible, keep all ESD-sensitive parts in a grounded metal case.
ESD
v Be very careful when you work with ESD-sensitive parts in cold weather. Low humidity and heating increase static electricity.
4. Do the following steps only on the DDM you are removing. 5. Open the DDM handle, press the blue latch 3 , and pull the handle down 4 . This action pulls the DDM partly out of its slot. Allow the DDM to spin down for at least three seconds before continuing with the next step.
6. Grip the handle, and carefully pull the DDM module out of the drawer. As the drive comes out, put one hand under it to prevent it from falling.
8. Install a new DDM into the empty slot, go to Replacing a Disk Drive Module
3. With one hand under the DDM, align the DDM with the groove, and push it into its slot 3 . The drive stops before it is fully seated.
10
5. Verify that the front of the new DDM is aligned with the other DDMs. 6. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
11
Figure 10. DDM bay Bypass and Passthrough Card Locations (S007732l)
2. Do the following steps only on the bypass or passthrough card you are replacing. 3. Disconnect all SSA device cable or cables from the bypass or passthrough card you are removing. Notes: a. To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group. b. For concurrent repairs, remove and replace only one bypass or passthrough card at a time. 4. Unscrew the captive screw or screws on the bypass or passthrough card you are replacing and pull the card out of the DDM bay: v Bypass card, unscrew two screws until free 4 Remove the bypass card then continue with step 5. v Passthrough card, unscrew one screw till free 5 or 6 Remove the passthrough card then continue with step 6 on page 13.
5. Verify that the jumpers on the bypass card 7 are set correctly. Jumper pins 2 to 3 at both 8 and 9 . Continue with step 6 on page 13.
12
3 21
3 21
9
Figure 12. DDM bay Bypass Card Jumper Settings (S008524l)
6. Replace parts in the reverse order, remember to reconnect the SSA device cables. Notes: a. When installing a bypass or passthrough card, insure that you push it in until it is seated. b. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
13
5. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: 1. When installing a controller cards, insure that you push it in until it is seated. 2. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
14
3
(4 Screws)
Front View
Figure 15. DDM bay Serial Number Plate Location (s009541)
10. Pull the frame assembly forward and remove it from the 2105. 11. Pull the storage bay air door, 2 in Figure 16 on page 16, down until it latches closed.
15
2
Figure 16. DDM Bay Locations (s009540)
12. Replace parts in the reverse order. 13. When you reinstall the frame assembly into the rack, reinstall the front mounting screws in the following sequence: a. Install the lower left-hand front mounting screw. This screw locates the DDM bay laterally. Do not fully tighten the screw yet. b. Install the other three front mounting screws. Do not fully tighten the screws yet. c. Fully tighten the lower left-hand front mounting screw. d. Fully tighten the other three front mounting screws. 14. When you reinstall the external SSA cables, use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, part 32H7059) to tighten the SSA connector screws. 15. Return to the procedure that sent you here.
16
17
Front View
I/O DRAWER 1 (R1-T1) I/O DRAWER 2 (R1-T2) Tx-u0.1-P1-I1 Tx-u0.1-P1-I2 SSA Device Cards Tx-u0.1-P1-I11 Tx-u0.1-P1-I12
Figure 17. 2105 Model 800 Cluster SSA Device Card Connectors (s009166)
2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 and locate the cluster and the SSA device card with the SSA cable you will be removing. See 2105 Model 800 SSA Device Card Location Codes and Locating an SSA Cable in chapter 7 of the Volume 3. Note: From the front of the 2105 Model 800, cluster 1 (T1) is on the left and cluster 2 (T2) is on the right. 3. Do the following steps only on the SSA device cable you are removing. 4. Disconnect the end of the SSA cable (source) identified in the location code and connect the new SSA cable to the same connector. Note: To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group. 5. Locate the correct DDM bay. See Locating a DDM Bay in a 2105 Rack in chapter 7 of the Volume 3. 6. Disconnect the other end of the old SSA cable from the DDM bay, and connect the new SSA cable to the same connector. Note: Allow the new cable to hang free until testing is complete.
18
19
Cluster CEC Drawer, 2105 Model 800, FRU Remove and Replace Procedures
Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.
20
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 19. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009294)
2. Ensure that the cluster you are powering off is quiesced to prevent interruption of customer operation. Attention: If the cluster being powered off is not quiesced, connect the service terminal to the other cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu Alternate Cluster Repair Menu Quiesce the Alternate Cluster 3. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 and locate the RPC cards 1 . 4. Power off cluster 1 or cluster 2: Attention: The RPC card switches initiate a software shutdown that takes two to three minutes to complete. v Cluster 1, press the top switch 2 and 4 on both RPC cards at the same time. v Cluster 2, press the bottom switch 3 and 5 on both RPC cards at the same time.
21
RPC-1 Card
2 3
1 4
RPC-2 Card
Rear View
Figure 20. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228)
5. Wait up to 4 minutes for the CEC drawer operator panel to display OK, the cluster is powered off. Sometimes it may still display READY. Press the CD-ROM Drive eject button. If the CD tray does not open, the cluster has powered off. 6. Return to the cluster procedure that sent you here to power the cluster off.
22
RPC-1 Card
2 3
1 4
RPC-2 Card
Rear View
Figure 21. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228)
4. Wait about 30 seconds for the cluster to power on. The cluster is powered on when the Line Cord indicators on the 2105 operator panel stop blinking. 5. Return to the cluster procedure that sent you here to power the cluster on.
23
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 22. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)
2. Do the following steps only on the CEC drawer you are moving to its service position. 3. Are you here to replace a SCSI hard drive? v Yes, the cluster remains powered on and available for customer use. Go to step 5. v No, continue with the next step. 4. Verify the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using the Alternate Cluster Repair Menu options. 5. Do not remove any CEC drawer cables unless instructed to do so. 6. Remove the four CEC drawer retaining screws 1 and 2 . Save the screws for installation. 7. Pull the CEC drawer out slowly until it latches at its service position. Release any cable ties that restrict the movement of the cables attached to the CEC drawer. If the drawer does not move freely, check that the cable arms are not binding.
24
Front View
Figure 23. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009229)
8. Return to the procedure that sent you here to remove the CEC drawer. After the CEC drawer repair activity is complete, return to step 9 to install the CEC drawer into the 2105 Model 800. 9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: 1. Release the latches on the side of each rail to slide the CEC drawer into the 2105. 2. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
25
Front View
Figure 24. CEC Drawer Top Cover Removal (s009230)
2. Raise the front of the top cover 2 and remove it from the drawer. 3. Return to the cluster CEC drawer FRU replacement procedure that sent you here to open the CEC drawer top cover for service. After the CEC drawer repair activity is complete, return to step 4 to install the CEC drawer cover. 4. Replace parts in the reverse order. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
CEC Drawer Operator Panel and EEPROM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the CEC drawer with the drawer operator panel you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1, CEC drawer 1, (T1-U1.1): - CEC drawer operator panel, (T1-U1.1-OPPAN) 1 - CEC drawer operator panel EEPROM, (T1-U1.1-OPEE) 7 Cluster 2, CEC drawer 2, (T2-U1.1): - CEC drawer operator panel, (T2-U1.1-OPPAN) 2 - CEC drawer operator panel EEPROM, (T2-U1.1-OPEE) 7
26
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 25. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)
1
Cluster 1 CEC Drawer Cluster 2 CEC Drawer
Front View
Figure 26. CEC Drawer Operator Panel Location (s009232)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster and CEC drawer with the drawer operator panel you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Loosen the two drawer operator panel mounting screws 3 and 4 remove the operator panel from the CEC drawer. 5. Disconnect the cable from the bottom of the drawer operator panel 8 .
27
Front View
Figure 27. CEC Drawer Operator Panel Removal (s009231)
6. Move the VPD module 7 (U2 on the operator panel card) from the old CEC drawer operator panel to the new one. Insert a small screw driver through the hole 6 on the top of the enclosure to remove the module. If the old VPD module is the problem, install the new VPD module and call technical support for recovery instructions. Note: Install the VPD module with the dot 5 to the top left when viewed from the rear.
6 5
8
Figure 28. CEC Drawer Operator Panel VPD Module Swap (s009233)
7. Replace parts in the reverse order. 8. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
CD-ROM and Hard Disk Drive Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure.
28
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 29. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)
29
2 (Tx-U1.1-HDD2)
(Tx-U1.1-HDD1) 1
(Tx-U1.1-CDROM) 3
FR
ON
Figure 30. 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer Drive Locations (s009265)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC drawer and the CD-ROM drive or hard disk drive you are replacing. 3. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23 and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 4. Locate the drive you will be removing: v Hard disk drive 1 (Tx-U1.1-HDD1) 1 (or U0.1-P1-Z1-A0.0 from an SMS error log) v Hard disk drive 2 (Tx-U1.1-HDD2) 2 (or U0.1-P1-Z1-A2.0 from an SMS error log) v CD-ROM drive (Tx-U1.1-CDROM) 3 (or U0.1-P1-Z1-A3.0 from an SMS error log) 5. Go to the step for the drive you are replacing: v Hard disk drive (HD), go to Hard Disk Drive Removal and Replacement on page 33. v CD-ROM drive, go to CD-ROM Drive Removal and Replacement.
30
Front View
Figure 31. CEC Drawer Drive Mounting Screws (s009266)
3. Push the CD-ROM to the rear until its front bezel clears the front panel of the drawer. Lift the CD-ROM out, cable end first, and lay it on its side on top of the hard disk drives. 4. Remove the screw 5 from the bottom of the CD-ROM cable connector retainer 6 . Disconnect the cable from the CD-ROM drive.
31
Front
N RO
T
7
5. Transfer all mounting brackets and guides to the new CD-ROM drive. 6. Transfer the jumpers, as needed, to the new CD-ROM drive. Note: When replacing the CD-ROM (SCSI ID=3) drive, verify that the three jumpers on the option block (pins 1, 2, and 4) on the rear of the new drive are in the same position, 8 in Figure 33, as on the drive you are replacing.
CD-ROM Drive
12 4 12 4
8 8 (3 Jumpers)
Figure 33. CD-ROM Drive Jumpers (s009268)
32
10 11
N RO
N RO
4. Transfer all mounting brackets and guides to the new hard disk drive. 5. Transfer the jumpers, as needed, to the new CD-ROM drive.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
33
Pin 6
Pin 1
Rear View
34
A B C DE F G
Jumper Block
Pin 1 Pin 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
35
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 37. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)
Top View
1 (Tx-U1.1-P1)
Front
Figure 38. CEC Drawer Planar Assembly Locations (s009295)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC drawer with the CEC drawer planar assembly you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing.
36
Rear View
Figure 39. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009251)
5. Verify that the four power input cables to the two CEC drawer power supplies have been unplugged before continuing. (This should already have been done in MAP 4700: Cluster FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before coming here.) 6. Pull each power supply out only until it unplugs and is free from the CEC power planar. 7. At the front of the rack, pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, see CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23. 8. Open the CEC drawer top cover and remove it, see CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 9. Remove the following cards from the CEC drawer: v CEC processor card 4 , see CEC Processor Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 on page 44 v CEC memory riser card 1 5 , see Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 46 v CEC memory riser card 2 (may not be present) 6 , see Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 46
37
5 6
O FR
Figure 40. CEC Processor and Memory Card Locations (s009270)
NT
10. Disconnect all logic cables from the planar assembly. Do not remove the three large power bus cables 16 [Figure 43] screwed to the planars. 11. Loosen the two safety guard plate mounting screws 8 , then remove the plate 7 [Figure 40].
38
9
Figure 41. CEC Drawer Locations (s009271)
12. Remove the card cage assembly mounting screws, two front 14 [Figure 42] and three rear 13 [Figure 42]. Remove the CEC card cage assembly 10 from the drawer. Note the alignment pin on the card cage 15 for reassembly. 13. Remove the card shield 11 from the planar assembly.
39
10
Top View
13
11
14
Front
12 15
FR
ON
14. Remove the three screws 9 [Figure 41] from the front of the drawer. Loosen the four keyed nuts 17 [Figure 43] and lift the to the CEC drawer planar assembly 12 [Figure 42] out of the drawer.
40
16
17
(4 NUTS)
Figure 43. CEC Drawer Locations (s009273)
15. Replace parts in the reverse order: Notes: a. Transfer any connector covers to the new planar. b. When you install the CEC drawer planar assembly, install and tighten the three front screws 9 [Figure 41], before you tighten the four keyed nuts 17 [Figure 43]. c. When you install the CEC card cage 10 [Figure 42], verify that the pin on the front of the card cage 15 [Figure 42] is seated in the planar board. 16. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
CEC Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The CEC drawer power supply is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the CEC drawer power supply you will be removing:
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
41
1 2 3 4
(R1-)
3 T2-U1.1-V1 1 T1-U1.1-V1
4 T2-U1.1-V2 2 T1-U1.1-V2
Rear View
Figure 44. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009236)
2. Do the following steps only on the CEC drawer power supply you are removing. 3. Locate the cable arm assembly with the power supply cables. Loosen the cable arm retaining bracket screw 8 . Rotate the bracket until the cable arm is free, then rotate the cable arm assembly out.
42
7 6 8 5
Rear View
Figure 45. CEC Drawer Power Supply Cable Arm Locations (s009465)
4. Remove the velcro 6 and/or the cable clamps 5 , 7 , and 9 from the cable arms as needed to allow the power supply to be removed. 5. THE CLUSTER WILL POWER OFF IF A POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR MORE THAN FOUR MINUTES. Be sure the replacement power supply is ready for installation. When the power supply is removed, a power supply (working or not) must be reinstalled within 4 minutes. Note: The cluster firmware checks if the power supply FRUs are physically installed. If it detects a power supply as missing, it waits four minutes and then powers off the the cluster. A power supply that is not installed, creates a problem with the cooling air flow, that can cause components to overheat. As long as the firmware detects the power supply, it does not matter if the power supply is working, the firmware will not power off the cluster. 6. Disconnect the cables 10 from the CEC drawer power supply. Attention: This attention applies only to the CEC drawer power supply replacement. When the first cable is connected to the newly installed power supply, an electric arc may result. This arc is caused by the charging of a large capacitor in the power supply and is normal.
43
(R1-)
10
11 12 13
1
PWR 1 2 J1 J2
ON CHK/ PWR-GOOD
OFF
Rear View
14
7. Remove the CEC drawer power supply mounting screw 11 . Loosen the cam latch locking screw until it is free 12 . Note: The power supply plugs into the CEC drawer power planar. 8. Pull the cam latch 13 down. (This lever cams the power supply assembly out and in.) Pull the power supply 14 out of the rack. 9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention:If the new CEC drawer power supply has a power switch, make sure that its power switch is set to the On (Up) position before installation. Note: Later versions of the power supply may have the switch removed or covered up. 10. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
44
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 47. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)
1 (Tx-U1.1-P1-C1)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC bay with the CEC processor card 5 you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20, CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23, and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 5. Open open and remove the CEC drawer top cover, see CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25.
45
4 3 2
5 (Tx-U1.1-P1-C1)
FR
ON
8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the CEC memory riser card you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) : - Memory riser card 1, (T1-U1.1-M1) 1 - Memory riser card 2, (T1-U1.1-M2) 2 Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) : - Memory riser card 1, (T2-U1.1-M1) 1 - Memory riser card 2, (T2-U1.1-M2) 2
46
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 50. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)
1 (Tx-U1.1-P1-M1) 2 (Tx-U1.1-P1-M2)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC bay with the CEC memory riser card you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20, CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23, and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 5. Locate the memory riser card you are removing: v Memory riser card 1, (T2-U1.1-M1) 5 v Memory riser card 2, (T2-U1.1-M2) 6
47
5 Tx-U1.1-P1-M1 4 6 Tx-U1.1-P1-M2
FR
ON
8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Transfer the memory card modules to the new card or replace the failing memory card module, see Memory Riser Card, Memory DIMM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Memory Riser Card, Memory DIMM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Remove the cluster CEC drawer memory riser card with memory DIMM you are servicing, see Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 46. 2. Locate the memory DIMM connectors and determine which module you are replacing, see Figure 53 on page 49: v 2105 Model 800:
48
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 53. 2105 Model 800 Cluster CEC Drawer Locations (s009227)
49
15 SLOT (15)A 13
SLOT (13)B 11 SLOT (11)C 9 SLOT (9)D
SLOT (16)A 16 SLOT (14)B 14 SLOT (12)C 12 SLOT (10)D 10 SLOT (8)D SLOT (6)C SLOT (4)B SLOT (2)A
7 SLOT (7)D 5 1
SLOT (5)C 3 SLOT (3)B SLOT (1)A
8 6 4 2
DIMM INSTALLATION
Figure 54. 2105 Model 800 Memory Riser Card Memory DIMM Locations (s009241)
3. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC drawer memory riser card with the memory DIMM you are replacing. 4. Remove the memory DIMM by pushing the locking tabs 17 out on the memory connector. Then pull the memory DIMM straight out of the connector.
5. Replace parts in the reverse order. Align the slots in the memory DIMM with the keys in the connector 18 . Then push the module down until the connector locking tabs move in and hold the module. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
50
Drawer Fan Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. Attention During the removal, note the position of all cables so they can be positioned correctly during the replacement. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the cluster fan you are replacing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1): - Cluster CEC drawer fan (left), (T1-U1.1-F7) 1 - Cluster CEC drawer fan (right), (T1-U1.1-F8) 2 Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1): - Cluster CEC drawer fan (left), (T2-U1.1-F7) 3 - Cluster CEC drawer fan (right), (T2-U1.1-F8) 4
51
(R1-)
Cluster 1 (T1)
Cluster 2 (T2)
1 (T1-U1.1-F7)
3 (T2-U1.1-F7)
2 (T1-U1.1-F8)
4 (T2-U1.1-F8)
Front View
Figure 57. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009235)
2. Do the following steps only on the CEC drawer cluster fan you are replacing. Attention: Be sure that the replacement drawer fan is ready to install, if the drawer fan is removed for longer than 4 minutes, a shutdown command will be issued to the cluster. 3. Unplug the fan from its connector on the front of the CEC drawer: v Cluster CEC drawer fan (left), connector FAN 7 6 v Cluster CEC drawer fan (right), connector FAN 8 7 4. Remove the two fan mounting screws 5 or 8 . Remove the fan guard and fan from the cluster. 5. Observe the fan and fan guard you are removing so you can mount the new fan in exactly the same position. Note the airflow and rotation arrows and the location of the fan power cable.
52
FAN 7 FAN 8
5 (2 Screws)
8 (2 Screws)
6. Remove the original fan from the fan guard and install the new fan into the fan guard. 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Install the new fan with its power lead and airflow and rotation arrows in the same positions as on the fan you removed. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Drawer Fan Controller and LED Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the CEC fan controller or LED card you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) : - CEC fan controller card, (T1-U1.1-X2) 1 - CEC LED card, (T1-U1.1-L1) 2 Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) :
53
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 59. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)
1 (Tx-U1.1-X2)
2 (Tx-U1.1-L1)
FR
ON
Figure 60. Cluster, CEC Drawer Fan Controller and LED Card Locations (s009240)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC bay with the CEC fan controller or LED card you are replacing. 3. Go to the correct step for the FRU you are replacing: v Replacing CEC fan controller card, continue with the next step. v Replacing CEC LED card, go to step 9 on page 55.
54
N RO
T
3 4
8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here. 9. Power off the cluster, then loosen the two LED card mounting screws 7 . See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20. 10. Remove the cable tie securing the excess cable (LED) 6 behind the CD-ROM. 11. Lift the LED card 8 off of the mounting screws and pull it out of the CEC. Disconnect the cable (LED) 6 from the rear of the LED card.
55
FR
7
(2 Screws)
ON
12. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
56
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 63. CEC Cable Locations (s009227)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC drawer with the cluster CEC drawer cable you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20, CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23, and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 5. Locate the cable you are replacing in Table 6 on page 58. 6. Locate the cables connectors, from Table 6 on page 58, in the following figures: v Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 1, see figure 58 v Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 2, see figure 59 v Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 3, see figure 60
57
System planar to power PDC/P5, Power Card GHPR, Gopher Card distribution cable Power distribution card to system planar cable Power distribution card to fans cable Front plate to media SCSI cable SCSI devices power cable Power distribution card to fan controller card PDC/P4, Power Card GOPHER CD, Gopher Card PDC/P7, Power Card AMD7, Chassis Front BULKHEAD, Chassis HDD1, Hard Disk Front Drive 1 BULKHEAD, Chassis HDD1, Hard Disk Front Drive 1 PDC/P3, Power Card SPINNER CARD, Fan Controller Card AMD8, Chassis Front HDD1, Hard Disk Drive 2 HDD1, Hard Disk Drive 2 CD-ROM, CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM, CD-ROM Drive
FR
T ON
LED
P6
58
F
AMD8
N RO
59
HDD1 CD-ROM
T ON FR
HDD2
7. Use these drawings to locate all of the cables connectors and how the cable is routed and retained. 8. Attention: Carefully note the routing and retention of the cable you are removing, so you can position it correctly during the replacement. Remove the cable from the cluster CEC drawer. 9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
60
Cluster I/O Drawer, 2105 Model 800, FRU Remove and Replace Procedures
Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.
61
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 67. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009294)
2. Ensure that the cluster you are powering off is quiesced to prevent interruption of customer operation. Attention: If the cluster being powered off is not quiesced, connect the service terminal to the other cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu Alternate Cluster Repair Menu Quiesce the Alternate Cluster 3. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 and locate the RPC cards 1 . 4. Power off cluster 1 or cluster 2: Attention: The RPC card switches initiate a software shutdown that takes two to three minutes to complete. v Cluster 1, press the top switch 2 and 4 on both RPC cards at the same time. v Cluster 2, press the bottom switch 3 and 5 on both RPC cards at the same time.
62
RPC-1 Card
2 3
1 4
RPC-2 Card
Rear View
Figure 68. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228)
5. Wait up to 4 minutes for the CEC drawer operator panel to display OK, the cluster is powered off. Sometimes it may still display READY. Press the CD-ROM Drive eject button. If the CD tray does not open, the cluster has powered off. 6. Return to the cluster procedure that sent you here to power the cluster off.
63
RPC-1 Card
2 3
1 4
RPC-2 Card
Rear View
Figure 69. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228)
4. Wait about 30 seconds for the cluster to power on. The cluster is powered on when the Line Cord indicators on the 2105 operator panel stop blinking. 5. Return to the cluster procedure that sent you here to power the cluster on.
64
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 70. I/O Drawer Service Position (s009284)
2. Do the following steps only on the I/O drawer you are moving to its service position. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using the Alternate Cluster Repair Menu options. 4. Do not remove any I/O drawer cables unless instructed to do so. 5. Remove the four I/O drawer retaining screws 1 and 2 . Save the screws for installation. 6. Pull the I/O drawer out slowly until it latches at its service position. Release any cable ties that restrict the movement of the four CPI cables attached to the I/O drawer. Note: Later level CPI cables have been lenghtened to avoid removing cable ties.
Front View
Figure 71. I/O Drawer Service Position (s009302)
7. Return to the procedure that sent you here to remove the I/O drawer. After the I/O drawer repair activity is complete, return to step 8 on page 66 to install the I/O drawer into the 2105 Model 800.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
65
2 1
3
Figure 72. I/O Drawer Top Cover Removal (s009303)
2. Raise the front of the top cover 2 and remove it from the drawer. 3. Return to the cluster I/O drawer FRU replacement procedure that sent you here to open the I/O drawer top cover for service. After the I/O drawer repair activity is complete, return to the next step to install the I/O drawer cover. 4. Replace parts in the reverse order.
66
Diskette Drive Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the I/O drawer diskette drive you are replacing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - Diskette drive, (T1-U0.1-P1-D1) 1 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - Diskette drive, (T2-U0.1-P1-D1) 1
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 73. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
67
1 Tx-U0.1-P1-D1
Front View
Figure 74. I/O Drawer Diskette Drive Location (s009304)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer diskette drive you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 5. Locate the drive you will be removing: v Diskette drive (Tx-U0.1-P1-D1) 1
68
4 3
Re
ar
6. Disconnect the cables 3 from the rear of the diskette drive. 7. Remove the two disk mounting screws 2 from the front of the drawer. 8. Push the disk to the rear until it clears the front panel of the drawer. Lift the disk out, cable end first. 9. Transfer all mounting brackets and guides 4 and 5 to the new diskette drive 6 . 10. Replace parts in the reverse order. 11. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
69
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 76. I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Location (s009284)
70
1 (Tx-U0.1-P1-V3)
Top View
Front
Figure 77. I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Location (s009299)
3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the I/O drawer planar assembly battery you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Open the I/O drawer top cover to the service position, see I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 7. Locate the I/O drawer planar assembly battery you are removing: v I/O drawer planar assembly battery (V3) 1 8. Remove the NVS battery assembly, see NVS Battery Assembly Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 92. The I/O drawer planar assembly battery is accessed through a hole in the bottom of the NVS battery tray. 9. Remove the I/O drawer planar assembly battery by sliding it out of the opening in the mounting socket. Attention: Dispose of the I/O drawer planar assembly battery according to local regulations. Lithium manganese dioxide batteries are not returned to IBM. 10. Before you install the new battery, drain the charge on the NVRAM by doing one of the following: v Briefly short the planar battery mounting socket plus (+) and minus (-) contacts together with a metal tool. This will quickly drain the charge. v Wait 15 minutes for the charge to drain off. 11. Replace parts in the reverse order.
71
72
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 78. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
Front
1 (Tx-U0.1-P1)
Top View
Figure 79. 2105 Model 800 Cluster I/O Drawer Locations (s009300)
3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the I/O drawer planar assembly you are replacing.
73
Rear View
Figure 80. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009394)
6. Remove both of the I/O drawer power supplies for the I/O drawer you are servicing. See I/O Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 on page 78. Return here and continue with the next step. 7. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, see I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64. 8. Open the I/O drawer top cover and remove it, see I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 9. Remove the NVS battery assembly 4 from the I/O drawer, see NVS Battery Assembly Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 92.
74
Fr
on
10. Remove all of the following cards from the I/O drawer: v SSA device cards 5 and 11 , see SSA Device Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 81 v NVS/IOA cards 6 and 9 , see NVS/IOA Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 85 Note: The CPI cable connector can be easily damaged during a FRU replacement. Temporarily use a velcro cable tie to secure the loose cable end where it will not be damaged. The velcro cable tie can be removed from elsewhere on the 2105. Return the tie when finished. v NVS battery charger cards 7 and 10 , see NVS Battery Charger Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 88 v RIO card assembly 8 , see RIO Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 98
75
10 11
Front View
Figure 82. I/O Drawer Card Locations (s009397)
11. Do not remove the diskette drive, RJ45 card, or the fan controller card from the I/O drawer, they come with the new I/O drawer planar assembly. 12. Disconnect any remaining cables from the front of the I/O drawer. 13. Push the drawer in, from the rear, reach in through the power supply area and remove the two rear mounting screws, shown in 15 . Attention: When installing the mounting screws for the new planar assembly, install and tighten the two rear screws 15 first. 14. Pull the drawer out to the service position, remove the two screws 13 from the front of the drawer. 15. Slide the I/O drawer planar assembly 12 out of the I/O drawer chassis 14 . Note: The I/O drawer planar assembly 12 [Figure 83], which includes the surrounding sheet metal, is replaced as a single FRU. Disassembly is not required.
76
13 (2 screws)
14 12
(FRU Assembly, do not disassemble)
15 (2 screws)
Rear
15 (2 screws)
Rear View
Figure 83. I/O Drawer Locations (s009523)
16. Transfer the cluster ID jumper 16 from the old I/O drawer planar assembly to the new one.
77
16
o Fr
Figure 84. I/O Drawer Locations (s009524)
nt
v Cluster 1, jumper assembly fence network I/O-1 (P/N 18P3209) v Cluster 2, jumper assembly fence network I/O-2 (P/N 18P3210) 17. Replace parts in the reverse order: Notes: a. When installing the mounting screws for the new planar assembly, install and tighten the two rear screws 15 first. This is critical for correct alignment. b. Transfer any connector covers to the new planar. c. Verify the I/O drawer planar assembly battery is installed, see I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 69. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
I/O Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The I/O drawer power supply is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the I/O drawer power supply you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1)
78
(R1-)
Cluster 2 (T2)
3 (T2-U0.1-V1)
Cluster 1 (T1)
1 (T1-U0.1-V1)
4 (T2-U0.1-V2) 2 (T1-U0.1-V2)
Rear View
Figure 85. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009301)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer power supply you are removing. 3. Locate the cable arm assembly with the power supply cables. Loosen the cable arm retaining bracket screw 8 . Rotate the bracket until the cable arm is free, then rotate the cable arm assembly out.
79
7 6 8 5
Rear View
Figure 86. I/O Drawer Power Supply Cable Arm Locations (s009466)
4. Remove the velcro 6 and/or the cable clamps 5 , 7 , and 9 from the cable arms as needed to allow the power supply to be removed. 5. THE CLUSTER WILL POWER OFF IF A POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR MORE THAN FOUR MINUTES. Be sure that the replacement power supply is ready to install. When the power supply is removed, a power supply (working or not) must be reinstalled within 4 minutes. Note: The cluster firmware checks if the power supply FRUs are physically installed. If it detects a power supply as missing, it waits four minutes and then powers off the the cluster. A power supply that is not installed, creates a problem with the cooling air flow, that can cause components to overheat. As long as the firmware detects the power supply, it does not matter if the power supply is working, the firmware will not power off the cluster. 6. Disconnect the cables 10 from the I/O drawer power supply. Attention: This attention applies only to the I/O drawer power supply replacement. When the first cable is connected to the newly installed power supply, an electric arc may result. This arc is caused by the charging of a large capacitor in the power supply and is normal.
80
(R1-)
10 11 12 13 1
J1 PWR 1 2 J2
ON CHK/ PWR-GOOD
OFF
14
Rear View
Figure 87. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009282)
7. Remove the I/O drawer power supply mounting screw 11 . Loosen the cam latch locking screw until it is free 12 . Note: The power supply plugs into the I/O drawer power planar. 8. Pull the cam latch 13 down. (This lever cams the power supply assembly out and in.) Pull the power supply 14 out of the rack. 9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention:If the new I/O drawer power supply has a power switch, make sure that its power switch is set to the On (Up) position before installation. Note: Later versions of the power supply may have the switch removed or covered up. 10. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
SSA Device Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Replacing the SSA device cards in slots 11 or 12 require that the NVS battery cable be disconnected from the NVS battery charger card. When this cable is reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
81
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 88. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
82
(R1- )
1 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I1) 2 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I2)
3 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I11) 4 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I12)
3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer and the SSA device card you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Loosen the two card retention bar screws 5 until they are free, then remove the bar 6 .
83
5 6
F
Figure 90. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009310)
N RO
7. Locate the SSA device card you are removing: v SSA device card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I1) 1 v SSA device card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I2) 2 v SSA device card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I11) 3 v SSA device card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I12) 4 8. Disconnect the SSA cables 9 from the connectors on the front of the SSA device card connectors, card slot I2 shown. Notes: a. Label the SSA cables, before disconnecting them, so they can be reconnected to their original connectors. b. To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group. 9. Do this step only if you are replacing the SSA device card in slot 11 3 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I11) or slot 12 5 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I12). Disconnect the cable from the top card connector 7 on the rear of the NVS battery charger card in slot 6 (T2-U0.1-P1-I6). Move the cable out of the way. 10. Remove the two front SSA device card mounting screws 8 and 10 . 11. Remove the SSA device card from the I/O drawer planar assembly by pulling it straight up.
84
10
11
12
Figure 91. SSA Card Locations (s009472)
12. Replace parts in the reverse order. When you install the SSA card, make sure it is correctly plugged into the connector on the I/O drawer planar assembly. Verify the cables to NVS battery charger cards in slots 6 and 10 are connected correctly. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
NVS/IOA Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Replacing the NVS/IOA card in slot 9 requires that the NVS battery cable be disconnected from the NVS battery charger card. When this cable is reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the NVS/IOA card you are replacing, see Figure 93 on page 86: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1) : - NVS/IOA card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I3) 1 - NVS/IOA card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I4) 2
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
85
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 92. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
(R1- )
I/O Drawer
86
5 6
F
Figure 94. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009310)
N RO
7. Locate the NVS/IOA card you are removing: v NVS/IOA card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I3) 1 v NVS/IOA card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I4) 2 v NVS/IOA card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I5) 3 v NVS/IOA card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I9) 4 8. Disconnect the cable from the connector 9 on the front of the NVS/IOA card. Label the cable as required. Note:
87
9 10
11
Figure 95. NVS/IOA Card Locations (s009473)
12. Replace parts in the reverse order. When you install the SAS card, make sure its front and rear connectors are correctly plugged into the connectors on the I/O drawer planar assembly. Verify the cables to NVS battery charger cards in slots 6 and 10 are connected correctly. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
NVS Battery Charger Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.
88
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 96. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
89
(R1- )
I/O Drawer
Front View Cluster 1 I/O DRAWER Cluster 2 I/O DRAWER NVS Battery Charger Cards
1 (Tx-U0.1-P1-13) 2 (Tx-U0.1-P1-14)
Figure 97. NVS Battery Charger Card Removal (s009313)
3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the NVS battery charger card you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Loosen the two card retention bar screws until they are free 3 then remove the bar 4 .
90
3 4 5 6
F
Figure 98. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009311)
N RO
7. Locate the NVS battery charger card you are removing: v NVS battery charger card (T2-U0.1-P1-I6) 1 v NVS battery charger card (T2-U0.1-P1-I10) 2 8. Disconnect the cable from the top card connector on the rear of the NVS battery charger card: v If replacing NVS battery charger card (T2-U0.1-P1-I6), disconnect the cable from the card you are removing (-I6) 5 . v If replacing NVS battery charger card (T2-U0.1-P1-I10), disconnect the cable from both battery cards (-I6) 5 and (-I10) 6 . 9. Remove the two front NVS battery charger card mounting screws 7 and the cable support bracket. 10. Remove the NVS battery charger card 8 from the I/O drawer planar assembly by pulling straight up.
91
8
Figure 99. NVS Battery Charger Card Locations (s009474)
11. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
NVS Battery Assembly Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. This procedure replaces the NVS battery assembly, both NVS battery FRU codes are packaged in one (unserviceable) assembly. 1. Replacing the NVS battery assembly will require that the NVS battery cables be disconnected from the NVS battery charger cards. When these cables are reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Locate the NVS battery assembly you are replacing, see Figure 101 on page 93: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - NVS battery assembly, (T1-U0.1-P1-I6-V9) and (T1-U0.1-P1-I10-V9) 1
92
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 100. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the NVS battery assembly you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
93
2 3
F
Figure 102. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009475)
N RO
7.
Disconnect the cables from the top card connector on the rear of the NVS battery charger cards in slot 6 (T2-U0.1-P1-I6) 4 and slot 10 (T2-U0.1-P1-I10) 5 . 8. Loosen the two NVS battery assembly mounting screws 6 until they are free. Lift the NVS battery assembly 7 out of the I/O drawer. Attention, Battery Disposal Information:This product contains a nickel metal hydride battery. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly. In the United States, IBM has established a collection process for reuse, recycling, or proper disposal of used IBM nickel metal hydride batteries. For information on proper disposal of these batteries, please contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please have the IBM part number listed on the battery available prior to your call. For information on disposal of nickel metal hydride batteries outside the United States, contact your local waste disposal facility.
94
4 5 6
9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: Before installing a new NVS battery assembly, carefully inspect the pins in the connector on the card for damage. Notes: a. The NVS battery assembly has information on a Date of First Charge label that needs to be entered into the functional code any time the batteries are replaced. Record the date indicated on this label. b. There may be an additional label indicating the last charge date. Information from labels, other than the Date of First Charge label, should only be used when this label is missing.
95
10.
After a successful replacement, use the service terminal Main Menu, Utility Menu, Battery Menu, Update Battery Installation Date option to reflect the new NVS Battery Installation Date. (This information is used to create error logs in the future to replace the NVS batteries before they exceed their expected life.) Follow the battery disposal procedure described in step 8 on page 94. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Fan Controller Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the fan controller card you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - I/O fan controller card, (T1-U0.1-X2) 1 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - I/O fan controller card, (T2-U0.1-X2) 1
96
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 105. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
1 2
Re
ar
Figure 106. Cluster, I/O Drawer Fan Controller Card Locations (s009467)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer and the I/O fan controller card you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
97
RIO Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Replacing the RIO card will require that the NVS battery cable be disconnected from the NVS battery charger card. When this cable is reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the RIO card you are replacing, see Figure 108 on page 99: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1): - RIO card, (T1-U0.1-P1.1) 1 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - RIO card, (T2-U0.1-P1.1) 1
98
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 107. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
(R1- )
I/O Drawer
Front View
Cluster 1 I/O DRAWER Cluster 2 I/O DRAWER
1 (Tx-U0.1-P1.1)
Figure 108. RIO Card Removal (s009259)
3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer and the RIO card you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Locate the RIO card you are removing: v RIO card (T1-U0.1-P1.1) 7
99
2 (2 screws)
4
Figure 109. RIO Card Locations (s009520)
9. Loosen the two card retention bar screws until they are free 5 then remove the bar 6 . 10. Disconnect the cable from the top card connector 8 on the rear of the NVS battery charger card in slot 6 (T2-U0.1-P1-I6).
100
5 6
8 7
F
Figure 110. RIO Card Locations (s009519)
N RO
11. Release the two card locking levers 9 and 10 at the same time, move them to the vertical position. These levers cam the RIO card out and in. 12. Remove the RIO card 11 from the I/O drawer planar assembly by pulling straight up.
101
10 11
F
Figure 111. RIO Card Locations (s009521)
N RO
13. Replace parts in the reverse order. Verify the cables to NVS battery charger cards in slots 6 and 10 are connected correctly. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
RJ45 Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4.
102
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 112. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
103
Front View
3
Figure 113. I/O Drawer RJ45 Card Locations (s009316)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O bay with the I/O RJ45 card you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 5. Disconnect the cable from the back of the RJ45 card (Tx-U0.1-??) 4 . 6. Disconnect any cables from the front of the RJ45 card 1 . 7. Remove the four screws 2 and 3 that mount the RF45 card to the front of the I/O drawer. Remove the RJ45 card 5 out the front of the drawer.
104
Re
ar
8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
105
(R1-)
Front View
Figure 115. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)
2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the cluster I/O drawer cable you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the cluster bay out to the service position, see CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23. 5. Open the cluster bay top cover to the service position, see I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64. 6. Locate the cable you are replacing in Table 7. 7. Locate the cables connectors in Table 7, then find the connectors in figure 107. 8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Table 7. Cluster I/O Drawer Cable and Connector Locations Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Name Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Connector Names and Locations: From: NVS to bottom card to bulkhead cable I/O drawer 1 fence network jumper (cluster 1 only) I/O drawer 2 fence network jumper (cluster 2 only) BC/P6, I/O drawer planar P1/Q5, I/O drawer planar P1/Q5, I/O drawer planar To: (no label), planar standoff
106
U0.1-RJ/P1
U0.1-P1/P14
P1/Q5
Front
BC/P6
(NO LABEL)
Top View
Front
107
108
Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the host bay with the card or planar you will be removing: Note: All cards shown may not be installed. v 2105 Model 800: Host bay 1, (R1-B1-) 1 Host bay 2, (R1-B2-) 2 Host bay 3, (R1-B3-) 3 Host bay 4, (R1-B4-) 4
109
Front View
Host Bays 1 2 3 4
(2 Screws)
2. Do the following steps only on the host bay you are moving to its service position. 3. Do not remove any bay cables unless instructed to do so. Note: The CPI cable connector can be easily damaged during a FRU replacement. Temporarily use a velcro cable tie to secure the loose cable end where it will not be damaged. The velcro cable tie can be removed from elsewhere on the 2105. Return the tie when finished. Loosen the tailgate cable clamps that are clamping the host cables that go to the host bay being serviced. See 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316. Pull enough of the host cables from under the floor to allow the host bay to be moved to its service position (about 1 meter or 3 feet). On host bays 1, 3, and 4 only, remove the CPI cable tie on the I/O drawer 6 above the host bay. Cable tie for host bay 4 shown. Release the two cable ties (velcro) 7 and 8 that restrict the movement of the two CPI cables attached to the host bay. Note: Some CPI cable brackets have slots for two velcro ties per cable, one upper 7 and one lower 8 . Do not reinstall the lower velcro tie in slot 8 , discard it. This allows the CPI cable to have a larger radius bend when the service action is completed.
4.
5. 6. 7.
110
Side View
Figure 118. CPI Cable Routing (s009645)
8. Loosen the two host bay retaining screws 5 until they are free (bay 4 shown). 9. Pull the host bay out slowly to the service position. 10. Return to the procedure that sent you here to remove the host bay. 11. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: 1. Release the latches on the side of each rail to slide the host bay into the 2105. 2. Some CPI cable brackets have slots for two velcro ties per cable, one upper 7 and one lower 8 . Do not reinstall the lower velcro tie in slot 8 , discard it. This allows the CPI cable to have a larger radius bend when the service action is completed. 3. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
111
1
Host Bays R1-B1 R1-B2 R1-B3 R1-B4
Front View
SCSI Connectors
5 ESCON Link
Connectors
ZA ZB
ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01
7 Link A
112
10
Front View
Figure 120. Removing Host Card from Host Bay (s009550)
Front View
8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. See Figure 131 on page 123 for the location of the ESD discharge pads. Notes: a. Fibre host card FRUs have a combination dust cover and wrap tool installed on each port. Leave the wrap tool installed until connecting the host cables. b. When a fibre channel host card is installed or replaced, the world-wide port name (WWPN) of the new card may be displayed during the service terminal Install or Repair process. Provide the customer with the new WWPN(s) that were indicated. c. Some CPI cable brackets have slots for two velcro ties per cable, one upper 11 and one lower 12 . Do not reinstall the lower velcro tie in slot 12 , discard it. This allows the CPI cable to have a larger radius bend when the service action is completed.
113
11
12
Side View
Figure 121. CPI Cable Routing (s009649)
d. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Host Bay Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The host bay power supply is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the host bay power supply you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Host bay power supply 1, (R1-B1-V1) 1 Host bay power supply 2, (R1-B1-V2) 2 Host bay power supply 1, (R1-B3-V1) 3 Host bay power supply 2, (R1-B3-V2) 4
114
(R1-)
3 R1-B3-V1
1 R1-B1-V1
4 R1-B3-V2
2 R1-B1-V2
Rear View
Figure 122. Host Bay Power Supply Locations (s009264)
2. Do the following steps only on the host bay power supply you are removing. 3. Set the host bay power supply power switch 9 to Standby (down) position.
R1
7 8
11
10
Rear View
Figure 123. Host Bay Power Supply Locations (s009435)
4. Disconnect the cables 5 and 7 from the host bay power supply. Note: If you have difficulty accessing the cable connectors, the I/O drawer (located above the power supply that you are removing) can be moved
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
115
Host Bay Drawer Backplane Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The host bay drawer backplane is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the host bay drawer backplane you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Host bay drawer backplane 1, (R1-B1-P2) 1 Host bay drawer backplane 2, (R1-B3-P2) 2
116
(R1-)
2 R1-B3-P2
(Behind Power Supplies)
1 R1-B1-P2
(Behind Power Supplies)
Rear View
Figure 124. Host Bay Drawer Backplane Locations (s009581)
2. Do the following steps only on the host bay drawer backplane, host bay power supplies, and host bays you are removing. 3. Move the two host bays 5 associated with the backplane you are replacing out until they are free of the host bay drawer backplane, seeMoving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109. v Host bay drawer backplane 1, (R1-B1-P2), cluster 1, host bays 1 and 2 v Host bay drawer backplane 2, (R1-B3-P2), cluster 2, host bays 3 and 4 4. Remove the host bay power supplies 3 associated with the backplane you are replacing, seeHost Bay Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 on page 114. v Host bay drawer backplane 1, (R1-B1-P2), cluster 1, host bay power supplies 1 and 2 v Host bay drawer backplane 2, (R1-B3-P2), cluster 2, host bay power supplies 1 and 2 5. Remove the six host bay drawer backplane mounting screws 4 . Remove the host bay drawer backplane cover 7 and backplane 6 .
117
(6 Screws)
7 6
5
Figure 125. Host Bay Drawer Backplane Locations (s009580)
6. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
118
Front View
Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4
ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4
Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A
ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01
3. Unplug the ESCON or Fibre channel cable from the ESCON or Fibre channel host card. Press the locking clips on the cable connector and pull the connector out of the host card. 4. On ESCON cables only, install an ESCON cable connector cover (P/N 7333186) onto the free ESCON cable connector. 5. Clean the wrap tool before you install it into the host card: v ESCON wrap tool (large), (P/N 5605670) v ESCON wrap tool (small), (P/N 05N6767) v Fibre channel (SW2 and LW2) wrap tool, P/N 11P3847 See Fiber and ESCON Optic Tools on page 120. Use the fiber optic cleaning procedure in the Fiber Optic Connector Cleaning Kit (New P/N 46G6844 or Old P/N 5453521). 6. Insert the clean wrap tool into the host card. Push the wrap tool in carefully until its latches click, locking the tool in place. 7. Return to the service terminal and follow the instructions on the SMIT screens.
119
120
1, 2, 3, 4,
(R1-)
Host Bays
Front View
2. Do the following steps only on the host bay with the planar you are replacing. 3. Disconnect both CPI cables from the two lower connectors on the front of the host bay 4 .
Front View
4. Remove all of the host cards from the host bay, use Host Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 on page 111. Note: Note the position of each cable and card for reinstallation. 5. Loosen the two screws 8 and 9 under the host bay drawer handle 7 until the front of the drawer 6 can be lifted clear of the slides.
121
2 5 6
7 8 5 9
Figure 129. Host Bay Card and Planar Locations (s009463)
7. Remove the host bay drawer assembly from the rack. 8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. See Figure 131 on page 123 for the location of the ESD discharge pads. Notes: 1. After the CPI cables are connected, and before the cable ties are installed, adjust the host bay drawer handle. Push the host bay drawer handle 7 up until it supports the CPI cables, then tighten the handles mounting screws 8 and 9 . When the handle is adjusted correctly the CPI connector and cable should be level, see Side View in 123. 2. Some CPI cable brackets have slots for two velcro ties per cable, one upper 10 and one lower 11 . Do not reinstall the lower velcro tie in slot 11 , discard it. This allows the CPI cable to have a larger radius bend when the service action is completed.
122
10
11
Side View
Figure 130. CPI Cable Routing (s009650)
3. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Cluster 1
Cluster 2
Front View
Figure 131. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Locations (s009395)
123
2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure FRU Remove and Replace Procedures
Rack, Subsystem Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.
Local Power
Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Front View
Front View
4. Set the Local Power switch to Off (down). 5. Wait for the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 to go off.
Subsystem Power On
1. Locate the subsystem operator panel on the front of the 2105 Model 800 you will be powering on.
124
Local Power
Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Front View
Front View
2. Set the Local Power switch to On (up). 3. Wait for the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 to go on.
Primary Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The primary power supply (PPS) is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Unless you have a particular reason, do not power off the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack when removing the primary power supply. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate the primary power supply you will be removing: Note: 2105 Model 800 rack shown. v 2105 Model 800: Primary power supply 1, right (R1-V1) 1 Primary power supply 2, left (R1-V2) 2 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Primary power supply 1, right (R2-V1) 1 Primary power supply 2, left (R2-V2) 2 2. Determine the part number of the failing primary power supply by reading the bar-code label on the left side of the power supply, see Figure 134 on page 126.
125
Bar-Code Labels
Low-Voltage
High-Voltage
Figure 134. 2105 Low-/High-Voltage Primary Power Supply Identification (s009542)
3. Select the latest available, low voltage or high voltage, replacement primary power supply that meets the racks requirements for input voltage. Notes: a. Always use the latest available primary power supply P/N. b. When an auto-ranging primary power supply is replaced with a power supply with a low-voltage or high-voltage designation, a new power information label is required. The new label replaces the label on the top corner of the right rear cover: v 2105 Model 800, power rating label, 18P5456 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure, power rating label, 18P5456 Attention: Do not install a low voltage primary power supply in a high voltage 2105. A low-voltage primary power supply will be damaged if connected to a high voltage ac input. 4. Do the following steps only on the primary power supply you are replacing: v If you are replacing primary power supply 1 (Rx-V1), go to step 5. v If you are replacing primary power supply 2 (Rx-V2), go to step 6. 5. Set the 390 V battery 1 5 MASTER circuit breaker 4 to Off (down), then go to step 6. Attention: If the 390 V battery MASTER circuit breaker is not set to off, false battery failure errors will occur when the new PPS is powered on. 6. Press the PPS system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00), 7 to Off (down). 7. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cable being removed in this step. Use caution when disconnecting all cables 6 . Unplug the cables by pulling the connector straight back from the primary power supply. Disconnect the J3 cable from the PPS.
126
PPS 1/2
Rear View
8. Disconnect the following cables from the PPS in the order shown: J7-5, J7-4, J7-3, J7-2, J7-1, J6, J4, then J2 (cable J2 is only present on PPSs in rack R2). 9. Disconnect cable J5A then J5B from the PPS. 10. Instruct the customer to switch off the circuit breaker that supplies mainline ac voltage to the power receptacle for the primary power supply you are replacing. 11. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag, S229-0237, and the safety lockout padlock to the customers ac voltage circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. 12. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack. Disconnect the mainline power cable, for the PPS you are replacing, from the connector on the line cord bracket: v Primary Power Supply 1 8 v Primary Power Supply 2 9 Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS being removed. 2105 Model 800 rack shown. 13. Remove the mainline power cable connector mounting plate screw 10 . Remove the mounting plate 11 . Move the cable and connector so they are free of the line cord bracket.
127
11 10
Front View
14. PPS 1 only, loosen the two cable routing bracket screws 14 and slide the bracket 15 out the rear of the frame. Move the mainline power cable so it is not behind the bracket. 15. Remove the velcro straps on the cable bracket 18 . Lift the power cables out of the bracket and move the cables aside to allow the PPS to be removed. 16. Disconnect any cable retention then push the PPS mainline power cable out the back of the 2105. 17. Remove the screw and star washer that mounts the PPS ground wire to the frame: v Primary Power Supply 1 16 v Primary Power Supply 2 13 Note: Save the screw and any star washer for reassembly.
18. Remove the four primary power supply mounting screws 17 and 19 , and the cable bracket 18 .
128
18
17
19
19. Read the following Caution notice before continuing. CAUTION: This unit weighs between 32 kg (70.5 pounds) and 55 kg (121.2 pounds). Three persons are required to safely move it. Using less than three persons to move it can result in injury. (1055) Determine if a replacement cart/extension assembly came in the FRU packaging material. Does the FRU packaging contain a replacement cart/extension assembly? v Yes, remove and replace the primary power supply using the Return Procedure and cart assembly that comes with the replacement FRU. Continue with step 23 when the primary power supply has been replaced. v No, continue with the next step. Slide the primary power supply out of the frame. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the machine input voltage information on this label matches the voltage of the primary power supply being installed. Install the PPS into the rear of the frame. Install the four PPS mounting screws, and the cable bracket 18 . After installing the new PPS into the frame do the following: a. Set PPS switch S1 (micro-processor switch) 20 to the DIS (disable) position. b. Set PPS system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) to Off (down). c. PPS 2 only, move the ground wire to the left side of the new PPS 12 . d. Connect the PPS ground wire to the frame using the screw and star washer. Install the mainline power cable connector into the line cord bracket. Install the mainline power cable mounting plate 11 and screw 10 . PPS 1 only, install the cable routing bracket 15 with the mainline power cable behind it. Tighten the two cable routing bracket screws 14 . Reinstall any cable retention. Connect the mainline power cable to the connector on the line cord bracket: v Primary Power Supply 1 8 v Primary Power Supply 2 9 Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS being replaced.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
20.
21.
22. 23.
24. 25.
26.
129
| | | | | | | |
130
EN DIS SI
20
EN DIS SI
Front View
Figure 139. PPS Micro-Processor Switch Location (s009545)
Mainline Power Cable Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate mainline power cable you will be removing: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. 2105 Model 800 rack shown. v 2105 Model 800: Mainline power cable 1, (R1-V1-Jx.x) Mainline power cable 2, (R1-V2-Jx.x) v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Mainline power cable 1, (R2-V1-Jx.x) Mainline power cable 2, (R2-V2-Jx.x) 1 2 1 2
131
Front View
3 (2 Screws)
2. Set the 390 V battery 1 7 MASTER circuit breaker (CB, S2) 6 to Off (down), then go to step 3. 3. Do the following steps only on the mainline power cable you are replacing and the PPS it is attached to. v Mainline power cable 1 1 , connects to PPS 1 8 v Mainline power cable 2 2 , connects to PPS 2 4 4. Press the PPS System Power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00), 9 to Off (down).
9
PPS 1/2
Rear View
132
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
Primary Power Supply Fan Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The primary power supply (PPS) fan is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.
133
Primary Power Supply Fan, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate the primary power supply fan you will be removing: 2105 Model 800 rack shown. v 2105 Model 800: Primary Power Supply 1, Fan 1, (R1-V1-F1) 1 Primary Power Supply 1, Fan 2, (R1-V1-F2) 2 Primary Power Supply 2, Fan 1, (R1-V2-F1) 3 Primary Power Supply 2, Fan 2, (R1-V2-F2) 4 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Primary Power Supply 1, Fan 1, (R2-V1-F1) 1 Primary Power Supply 1, Fan 2, (R2-V1-F2) 2 Primary Power Supply 2, Fan 1, (R2-V2-F1) 3 Primary Power Supply 2, Fan 2, (R2-V2-F2) 4
5
PPS 1/2
.
J8 J9
6 (2 Screws)
Front View
2. Do the following steps only on the primary power supply (PPS) fan you are replacing. 3. Unplug the fan from its J8 or J9 connector 5 on the PPS. 4. Observe the fan you are removing so you can mount the new fan in exactly the same position. Note the airflow and rotation arrows and the location of the fan power cable. 5. Remove the two fan mounting screws 6 and remove the fan from the PPS 6. Transfer the wire fan guard to the new fan. 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Install the new fan with its power lead and airflow and rotation arrows in the same positions as on the fan you removed. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
134
390 V Battery Set Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The 390 V battery set is one FRU. Always replace battery 1 and 2 at the same time. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate the 390 V battery set you will be removing: 2105 Model 800 rack shown. Attention: Both batteries in a 390 V battery set are always replaced at the same time. The FRU is always both batteries. v 2105 Model 800: 390 V Battery 1, (R1-V3) 1 390 V Battery 2, (R1-V4) 2 and v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: 390 V Battery 1, (R2-V3) 1 390 V Battery 2, (R2-V4) 2 and
(R1- )
4 (4 Screws)
Battery 2
5 (4 Screws)
Battery 1
2
Rear View
Figure 143. 390 V Battery Set Locations (s009447)
2. Do the following procedures only on the 2105 with the battery set you are replacing. 3. Disconnect any cable fastened to the rear cable routing brackets 6 and 9 .
135
5. On 390 V battery set 1, set the BATTERY MASTER circuit breaker (CB06) 3 to Off (down). Note: On early batteries, CB06 is labeled S2. 6. Read the following DANGER notice before continuing: DANGER Greater than 300 V dc present on the bulk P.S. to 390 V battery cable connector. To prevent a possible electrical shock, always disconnect this cable at the bulk power supply Battery Power connector before servicing the 390 V battery. (1011) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of the Volume 3. Attention: When removing the battery, always disconnect J5A first, then J5B. When installing the battery always connect J5B first, then J5A. a. Disconnect the 390 V battery set 1 cable from PPS 1 connector J5A 13 . b. Disconnect the 390 V battery set 1 cable from PPS 1 connector J5B 12 . c. Press the PPS 1 system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 11 , to off (down). d. Disconnect the PPS 1 to PPS 2 communication cable from PPS 1 connector J3 10 .
136
J3
10
PPS 1
CB00
11
13
J5A
12
J5B
Rear View
Figure 145. PPS 1, 390 V Battery Set Connector (s009448)
7. Disconnect the cable between battery set 1 (J2) 20 and battery set 2 (J1) 23 . 8. Read the following Caution notice before continuing: CAUTION: Each of the 390 V batteries in the battery set weighs >45 kg (>100 pounds). Two or more persons are required to safely move it. Using less than two persons to move it can result in injury. (1059) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of the Volume 3. 9. Remove screws 4 and 5 to remove and replace the 390 V batteries. Replace one battery at a time, using the Return Procedure and cart assembly that comes with the replacement FRUs. Continue with the next step when both batteries have been replaced. 10. Locate the Date of First Charge label. a. Before installing the 390 V battery set, look for the Date of First Charge label under the right handle 14 of each set of batteries. Each 390 V battery set has information on a Date of First Charge label that needs to be entered into the functional code whenever batteries are replaced. Record the date indicated on this label. b. If the label is not under the handle, it may be on the top cover of the battery. c. Information from labels other than the Date of First Charge label should only be used when this label is missing. Note: The 390V Battery FRU initial charge date must be entered so that a battery end of life problem will be correctly generated. The service login FRU replacement process should prompt you to enter the date. If you are not prompted, use the Main Service Menu, Utility Menu, Battery Menu, Update Battery Initialization Date option.
137
14
Figure 147. Date of First Charge Label Location (s009582)
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
11. Dispose of the battery set by returning it to IBM: This product contains a SEALED LEAD BATTERY. The BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. Attention: The 2105 390 V battery set assembly contains lead-acid-gel rechargeable batteries. Whenever the 390 V battery set assembly is replaced, the used battery set assembly must be returned to IBM by following the instructions that are shipped with the new battery set assembly. 12. Replace parts in the reverse order. 13. Set the customer mainline AC circuit breaker to on. 14. Set the 390 V battery MASTER circuit breaker (CB, S2) to On (up). 15. Set the PPS System Power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) to On (up). Note: When the battery circuit breaker is off, PPS 1 may display a status code of 03 or 04. Do not take any action to repair the 03 or 04 status code, continue with the replacement and verification of PPS 1. If the 03 or 04 status code is still displayed when this procedure is completed, repair the problem using MAP2470: Battery Set Detection Problem in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 book. 16. Observe the five LED indicators at the front of the PPS between the two cooling fans. Is the PWR GOOD indicator lit solid? v Yes, go to step 18. v No, go to the next step. 17. Press the operator panel Local Power switch momentarily to On (up). Note: Early levels of the PPS firmware would not automatically power on the PPS when input power was restored to the PPS. 18. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
138
Operator Panel Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure and locate the operator panel card you will be removing. v 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure: UEPO operator panel card, (R1-L1) 1 ON / OFF operator panel card, (R1-L2) 2 2. The entire subsystem must be powered off to replace the UEPO or ON/OFF operator panel card, see Rack, Subsystem Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure on page 124. 3. Turn the screw on the operator panel until it releases, then open the gate. 4. Pull the operator panel gate pins and move the operator panel to the vertical (shipping) position. 5. Release the three retaining clips and remove the cover from the rear of the operator panel. 6. Do the following steps only on the operator panel card you are replacing. 7. Disconnect all cables from rack operator panel card. 8. Press out on the clips that hold the operator panel card until the card is free. Remove the operator panel card from the housing.
139
LOCAL
L/R SWITCH
REMOTE
1
Clips
Front View
Rear View
Figure 148. 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Removal (s009449)
9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: After the repair is complete: a. Set the UEPO switch on the 2105 operator panel to On (up). b. Locate the hidden local/remote (L/R) switch on the back side of the UEPO operator panel card. Set the switch to the same position as it was on the original card. Set the switch by pulling up on it and moving it to the left (local) or right (remote) position. c. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Rack Power Control Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The rack power control card is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the rack power control card you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Rack power control-1 card, RPC-1 (R1-G1) 1 Rack power control-2 card, RPC-2 (R1-G2) 2
140
(R1-)
1
Rear View
2. Set the Power Select switches 3 on both RPC switch cards to the Local position (down). Note: This will prevent any power disruptions during service. Do the following steps only on the RPC card you are replacing. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cable being removed in this step. Use caution when disconnecting all cables. Disconnect the RPC power cable connector J2-6 first 5 . Disconnect the following cables, if present, from the J2- connectors 5 in the following order: J2-5 (if Expansion Enclosure is present), J2-3, J2-8, J2-9, J2-10, J2-11, J2-13, J2-14, and J2-15. Disconnect the operator panel cable connector RPC-J1 4 . Loosen the two bottom RPC card mounting screws 7 , then remove the two top mounting screws 6 and 9 . Lift the rack power control card 8 out of the rack.
3. 4.
5.
6. 7.
141
4 9
J1 RPC - 1
5 6
J2
SEE SERVICE MANUAL FOR USE OF SWITCHES
CL1 POWER
CL2 POWER
7
Figure 150. Rack Power Control Card Removal (s009402)
8. Remove the nine RPC card stiffener mounting screws 11 from the back of the RPC card. Remove the card 12 from the metal stiffener 10 .
Address Switches 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 1 5 0 1 6 0 0 1
10
(9 Screws)
RPC-1 Card
11
13
RPC-2 Card
14 12
Figure 151. Rack Power Control Card Replacement (s009403)
9. Install the new RPC card 12 onto the metal stiffener 10 . 10. Install the RPC card assembly into the rack. 11. Set the address switches 13 or 14 on the new RPC card to the same positions as they were on the old card. 12. Connect the following cables, if present, to the RPC card in the following order: J2-5 (if Expansion Enclosure is present), J2-3, J2-8, J2-9, J2-10, J2-11, J2-13, J2-14, J2-15, J1, and always last J2-6. 13. Reconnect the operator panel cable connector RPC-J1 4 . 14. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cables being connected in this step. Use caution when connecting these cables. Connect these cables by pushing the cable connector straight into the RPC card connector until it is firmly seated. 15. Set the Power Select switches 4 on both RPC cards to the same position they were in before FRU replacement. 16. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
142
RPC Switch Card (Local and Remote) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The RPC local and remote switch card is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the RPC local and remote switch card you will be removing: Note: There are two types of RPC switch cards: local and remote. v If no remote power control card is installed (without FC 1011), two RPC local switch cards are installed. v If a remote power control card is installed (with FC 1011), two RPC remote switch cards are installed. Always replace the switch card with the same type of card, local or remote, that was removed. v 2105 Model 800: Local power control, no remote power control card (without FC 1011) - RPC-1 local switch card, RPC 1 (R1-G5) 1 - RPC-2 local switch card, RPC 2 (R1-G6) 2 Remote power control, with remote power control card (with FC 1011) - RPC-1 remote switch card, RPC 1 (R1-G3) 3 - RPC-2 remote switch card, RPC 2 (R1-G4) 4 Note: For concurrent repairs, remove and replace only one RPC switch card at a time.
143
Rear View
CL1 POWER CL1 POWER
CL2 POWER
CL2 POWER
POWER SELECT 2
POWER SELECT 1
POWER SELECT 2
POWER SELECT 1
2
(R1-G6)
1
(R1-G5)
4
(R1-G4)
3
(R1-G3)
2. Set the LOCAL and REMOTE or AUTO switch 5 on both RPC switch cards to the LOCAL position (down). Note: This will prevent any power disruptions during service. 3. Do the following steps only on the RPC switch card you are replacing and its RPC card. 4. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cable being removed in this step. Use caution when disconnecting all cables. Unplug the cables by pulling the connector straight out of their sockets. v RPC-1 switch card: Disconnect cable J2-3 6 from RPC-1 card Disconnect all cables from the RPC-1 switch card 8 and if present 9 v RPC-2 switch card: Disconnect cable J2-3 7 from RPC-2 card. Disconnect all cables from the RPC-2 switch card 11 and if present 10
144
16
1 RPC-2 2
15
6
16
RPC-2 Card
J2
15
11
Rear View
8 9
10
5. Pinch the top and bottom tabs of the RPC switch card cover in 12 and remove the cover.
12
FR
ON
RE
AR
6. Remove the two RPC switch card mounting screws 13 , then remove the card 14 .
145
13 (2 screws)
14
Figure 155. RPC Switch Card Removal (s009458)
7. Replace the parts in the reverse order: v Set the Power Select switches 5 on the new RPC switch card to the LOCAL position (down). Note: This will prevent any power disruptions during service. v Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cables being connected in this step. Use caution when connecting these cables. Connect these cables by pushing the cable connector straight into the RPC switch card connector until it is firmly seated. Connect the RPC and RPC switch card cables as follows: RPC-1 switch card: - Connect all cables to RPC-1 switch card - Connect cable J2-3 to RPC-1 switch card RPC-2 switch card: - Connect all cables to RPC-2 switch card - Connect cable J2-3 to RPC-2 switch card v Set the LOCAL and REMOTE or AUTO switches on both RPC switch card to the same position they were in before replacement. v When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
146
Remote Power Control Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the remote power control card you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Remote power control card, (R1-G3) 1
(R1- )
2 3 1
Front View
Figure 156. Remote Power Control Card (s009450)
2. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800. Set the local/remote switches on both RPC cards to the local position, 4 in Figure 149 on page 141. 3. Disconnect all cables, and their ground jumpers, from the remote power control card. 4. Remove the remote power control card mounting screw 2 . 5. Remove the remote power control card 3 from the rack. 6. Replace parts in the reverse order. Set the local/remote switches on both RPC cards to their original positions. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
147
Storage Cage Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Storage Cage Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The storage cage power supply is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the storage cage power supply you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Storage cage 1 and 2: - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 1, (R1-Q1-V1) 1 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 2, (R1-Q1-V2) 2 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 3, (R1-Q1-V3) 3 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 4, (R1-Q1-V4) 4 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 5, (R1-Q1-V5) 5 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 6, (R1-Q1-V6) 6
(R1- )
(R1-Q1-Vx)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Rear View
v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Storage cage 1 and 2: - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 1, (R2-Q1-V1) 7 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 2, (R2-Q1-V2) 8 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 3, (R2-Q1-V3) 9 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 4, (R2-Q1-V4) 10 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 5, (R2-Q1-V5) 11
148
Storage Cage Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
- Storage cage 1 and Storage cage 3 and 4: - Storage cage 3 and - Storage cage 3 and - Storage cage 3 and - Storage cage 3 and - Storage cage 3 and 2, power supply 6, (R2-Q1-V6) 12 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, power power power power power supply supply supply supply supply 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, (R2-Q2-V1) (R2-Q2-V2) (R2-Q2-V3) (R2-Q2-V4) (R2-Q2-V5) 13 14 15 16 17
(R2-Q1-Vx)
7
2105 Expansion Enclosure
8 9 10 11 12
(R2-Q2-Vx)
19 35 40
13 14 15 16
Rear View
21
20
17 18
2. Do the following steps only on the storage cage power supply you are replacing. 3. Set the storage cage power supply switch 20 to off (down). 4. Disconnect all of the cables from the storage cage power supply. 5. Remove the two storage cage power supply mounting screws 19 . 6. Pull the power supply latch handle 21 up, then slide the storage cage power supply out of the rack. Note: The handle should be in the released (up) position when installing the power supply. 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: The storage cage power supply switch 20 must be set to off (down) before the new supply is installed. 8. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
| | |
149
Storage Cage Fan (Top) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The storage cage fan is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front or rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure and locate the storage cage fan you will be removing: See Figure 159 on page 151. Note: Storage cage fans are not installed in 2105 Model 800 positions: 2 , 5 , 8 , and 11 . v 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure (Top Fans): Storage cage 1 (U1): Storage Storage Storage Storage cage cage cage cage 1 1 1 1 fan fan fan fan 1, 2, 3, 4, front (R1-, R2-U1-F1) front (R1-, R2-U1-F2) front (R1-, R2-U1-F3) rear (R1-, R2-U1-F4) 1 2 3 4
- Storage cage 1 fan - Storage cage 1 fan Storage cage 2 (U2): - Storage cage 2 fan - Storage cage 2 fan - Storage cage 2 fan - Storage cage 2 fan
5, rear (R1-, R2-U1-F5) 5 6, rear (R1-, R2-U1-F6) 6 1, 2, 3, 4, front (R1-, R2-U2-F1) front (R1-, R2-U2-F2) front (R1-, R2-U2-F3) rear (R1-, R2-U2-F4) 7 8 9 10
- Storage cage 2 fan 5, rear (R1-, R2-U2-F5) 11 - Storage cage 2 fan 6, rear (R1-, R2-U2-F6) 12
150
(R1- )
(R2- )
F1 F2 F3
Front
Front View
Front View
2. Perform the following steps only on the storage cage fan you are replacing. 3. Disconnect the fans power connector 13 from the 2105. 4. Press the storage cage fan latch 14 up, and pull the fan out of the 2105. Attention: Do not remove a fan unless you have a new fan ready to install immediately. Rack cooling is reduced while the fan is removed.
13 14
Figure 160. Storage Cage Fan Replacement (s009549)
5. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Storage Cage Fan (Center) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The storage cage fan is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
151
Storage Cage Fan (Center), 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the cover of the 2105 rack and locate the storage cage fan you will be removing: Note: Open the operator panel gate in front of the storage cage fans. v 2105 Model 800: Storage cage 1, fan 1, (R1-Q1-F1) 1 Storage cage 1, fan 2, (R1-Q1-F2) 2 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Storage cage 1, fan 1, (R2-Q1-F1) 3 Storage cage 1, fan 2, (R2-Q1-F2) 4 Storage cage 2, fan 1, (R2-Q2-F1) 5 Storage cage 2, fan 2, (R2-Q2-F2) 6
(R1- )
(R2- )
Front View
Front View
2. Perform the following steps only on the storage cage fan you are replacing. Note: If you are replacing a storage cage 1 fan, open the operator panel gate for access. 3. Disconnect the fans power connector from the top of the storage cage power planar: v Fan 1 (J43 FAN TOP), 8 v Fan 2 (J44 FAN BOTTOM), 7
152
Storage Cage Fan (Center), 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Note: 2105 Model 800 frame shown. 4. Release any cable ties holding the fan power cable. 5. Observe the fan you are removing so you can mount the new fan in exactly the same position. Note the airflow and rotation arrows and the location of the fan power cable. 6. Remove the two fan mounting screws 9 or 10 , and remove the fan from the 2105.
7
J44 FAN BOTTOM
8
J43 FAN TOP
FAN 1
FAN 2
10
Front View
Figure 162. Storage Cage Fan (Center) Replacement (s009452)
7. Transfer the wire fan guard to the new fan. 8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Install the new fan with its power lead and airflow and rotation arrows in the same positions as on the fan you removed. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Storage Cage Power Planar Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. 1. Instruct the system operator to vary all of the devices in the subsystem offline. 2. Inform the customer that the complete storage facility subsystem will be unavailable.
153
Storage Cage Power Planar, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
3. Locate the subsystem operator panel on the front of the 2105 Model 800 for the subsystem you are powering off.
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency
Local Power
Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Front View
Front View
4. Set the Local Power switch to Off (down). Note: When the subsystem is powered off, it goes into a power standby mode. In power standby mode, both primary power supplies are active and supply power to the RPC cards and operator panel switches. 5. Wait for the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 to go off. 6. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the storage cage power planar you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Storage cage power planar 1, (R1-Q1-P1) 1 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Storage cage power planar 1, (R2-Q1-P1) 2 Storage cage power planar 2, (R2-Q2-P1) 3
154
Storage Cage Power Planar, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
(R1- )
(R2- )
Front View
Front View
7. Do the following steps only on the storage cage assemblies associated with the planar you are removing. 8. Go to the rear of the 2105 and locate the storage cage power supplies, plugged into the rear of the storage cage power planar. See Storage Cage Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure on page 148. Note: All of the storage cage power supplies may not be installed. Unplug all of the storage cage power supplies from the storage cage planar. Follow the storage cage power supply removal instructions on Storage Cage Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure on page 148. Do not completely remove the power supplies from the 2105, pull them out only about 5 cm (2 inches). 9. Locate the storage cage fan/power sense card, 1 , 2 , or 3 in Figure 169 on page 158, mounted just above the top storage cage power supply you just unplugged. Remove the storage cage fan/power sense card, see Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure on page 157. 10. Go to the front of the 2105 and locate the storage cage fan plate 8 in front of the power planar you are removing. Note: If you are replacing a storage cage power planar 1, open the operator panel gate for access. Disconnect both fan power connectors 4 and 6 from the top of the power planar. 11. Loosen the two left fan plate mounting screws 5 then remove the two right fan plate mounting screws 7 . Remove the storage cage fan plate 8 from the 2105.
155
Storage Cage Power Planar, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
6 7
(2 Screws)
5
Front View (2 Screws)
12. Loosen the three right and left power cage bracket mounting screws 12 and 15 . Remove both power cage brackets. 13 and 16 .
13. Disconnect all of the storage cage fan connectors from the top of the storage cage power planar 9 . If any fans are not installed, there will be fan jumper plugs on the unused fan connectors. Transfer these jumper plugs to the same connector positions on the new storage cage power planar. 14. Disconnect all of the storage cage DDM bay power cable connectors 10 and 11 from the power planar. Note: You may have to access the power planar to DDM bay power cables by reaching in through the DDM bay bay opening 17 . You can reach into an unused DDM bay position, or remove the right and left DDM bays
156
Storage Cage Power Planar, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
that give you the best access to the cables and connectors. See Frame Assembly Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay on page 14.
Figure 167. Power Planar to DDM Bay Power Cable Access (s008085l)
Front
Figure 168. Power Planar to DDM Bay Power Cable Details (s009460)
15. Remove the 13 storage cage power planar mounting screws 14 then remove the planar. 16. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: a. Make sure that all cables are connected to their original positions and are firmly seated. b. When you have completed this procedure, power the 2105 subsystem on. After the subsystem has powered on completely, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure.
157
Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure
Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure and locate the storage cage fan/power sense card you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Storage cage fan/power sense card 1, (R1-Q1-C1) 1 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Storage cage fan/power sense card 1, (R2-Q1-C1) 2 Storage cage fan/power sense card 1, (R2-Q2-C1) 3
(R1- )
(R2- )
1 2
Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card
3 4
Rear View
Rear View
2. Do the following steps only on the storage cage fan/power sense card you are replacing. 3. Loosen the two fan/power sense card screws 4 until they are free. 4. Pull the storage cage fan/power sense card out. Do NOT plug the new sense card in. Note: The card is plugged into the rear of the storage cage power planar. Do NOT plug the new sense card in. 5. Check if there is an external jumper or cable plugged into the sense card you just removed. If there are, connect them to the same position on the new sense card before plugging the card into the 2105 Model 800. 6. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
158
Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. See Figure 131 on page 123 for the location of the ESD discharge pads. This procedure removes and replaces the following 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure cables: v PPS to Elec Cage PS Cable (R1-Vx-J7x.x) v PPS to 390 V Battery Cable (Rx-Vx-J3.x) v 390 V Battery 1 to 2 Cable (Rx-Vx-Jx.x) v RPC to Operator Panel Cable (R1-Gx-Jx.x) v Primary P.S. to EPO Panel Cable (R1-G1-Jx.x) RPC Interconnect Cable (R1-G1-J6.x) RPC to Electronics Cage Cable (R1-Gx-J3.x) Storage Cage Fan Cable Assembly (Rx-Ux-P1-Jx) Power Planar to DDM Bay Planar Cable (Rx-Qx-P1/Jx) SCSI Cable (R1-Bx-Hx/ZA.x) CPI Local Cable (R1Tx-P2Ix/JB.1) Lower IOA connector (Read the Attention: at the end of this list.) v CPI Remote Cable (R1Tx-P2Ix/JA.1) Upper IOA connector (Read the Attention: at the end of this list.) v SSA Device Cables (Rx-Bww-Kx), go to page 17 v Mainline Power Cables (Rx-Vx-Jx.x), go to page 131 v v v v v v Attention: To prevent damage to the I/O attachment card connectors, use caution when re-installing the CPI cables. The CPI cable connectors should be inserted, as straight as possible, into the connectors on the I/O attachment cards. The screws on the CPI cable connectors should only be tightened finger-tight, do not use a screwdriver to tighten. Note: The CPI cable connector can be easily damaged during a FRU replacement. Temporarily use a velcro cable tie to secure the loose cable end where it will not be damaged. The velcro cable tie can be removed from elsewhere on the 2105. Return the tie when finished. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800. Set the local/remote switches on both RPC cards to the local position, 3 in Figure 149 on page 141. 2. Get the 2105 parts catalog, Enterprise Storage Serve Parts Catalog 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure book, S127-0977.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4
159
160
Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure using an MES Install a DDM bay Install a DDM bay (Model 800) with FC 0970
Install a Host Card Remove a Host Card Relocate a 2105 Subsystem Install a Relocated 2105 Subsystem
Discontinue a 2105 Subsystem Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status
161
162
PHASE 2 Power on, enter basic Install information (TCP/IP, date/time etc) and reboot
PHASE 2 Power on, enter basic Install information (TCP/IP, date/time etc) and reboot
PHASE 3 Install ESSNet, hub, modem. Configure master console and backup. Configure 2105 customer options, connect ESSNet to customer network and activate LIC features Test call home /Retain Configure copy services,
PHASE 3 Install ESSNet, hub, modem. Configure master console and backup. Configure 2105 customer options, connect ESSNet to customer network and activate LIC features Test call home /Retain Configure copy services,
LOAD LATEST CODE (as required) Install Latest Microcode. (Service code 33)
LOAD LATEST CODE (as required) Install Latest Microcode. (Service code 33) Start PHASE 5 in parallel
PHASE 5 Additional RETAIN testing Route/connect host cables Complete Install Tracking Report Finish, Tidy up. CE leaves site. (SC20 Complete)
PHASE 6 Logical config completes. ESS calls home. Support Center Inform customer / SSR of completion.
163
Table 10. 2105 Model 800 Install With ISA Using the Background Certify and Build Logical Config from ISA Process Installation Phase 1 2 3 Model 800 Only 1 hour 15 minutes (without FC 0970) 1 hour 2 hours 30 minutes (with ESSNet) 1 hour 15 minutes (without ESSNet) Code Load (SC 33) 3 hours (AutoLIC) 1 hour (QuickLIC) 4 5 6 45 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour Model 800 with Expansion Enclosure 2 hour 15 minutes (without FC 0970) 1 hour 2 hours 30 minutes (with ESSNet) 1 hour 15 minutes (without ESSNet) 3 hours (AutoLIC) 1 hour (QuickLIC) 45 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour
164
Step 3 on page 221 through Call Home Settings on 221 to 233 page 232 Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster on page 233 through Certify DDMs on page 252 Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254 Completing the Installation of the 2105 on page 251 through Finish the Install on page 259 233 to 253
165
__ 2.
__ 3.
__ 4.
You must fill out the service representative Worksheet Fields to be Completed fields on the worksheets from step 2 by Service Representative on page above in this table. 169 Determine if there is a required level of microcode available for your 2105 Model 800 by visiting the Shark Engineering Website: http://snjlnt01.sanjose.ibm.com/ lez9/SharkPE.nsf/wvhome. If there is, use the reference information for this step. v Checking for Required Microcode on page 169 and
__ 5.
__ 6.
Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine on page 170
__ 7.
Check RETAIN for 2105 Model 800 Install Check RETAIN for 2105 Model 800 Tips Install Tips on page 171
166
Checking Customer Preparation v AC power from two different sources for on page 171 each rack being installed. v Raised floor can support the weight: 2105 Model 800, maximum 1204 kilograms (2650 pounds) 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure, maximum 2545 kilograms (5600 pounds)
v Correct cooling airflow and temperature v Host system connection cables (SCSI, ESCON, or Fibre) v Ethernet LAN cable if attaching ESSNet console to customer network v Analog telephone line connection for Call Home/Remote Service v AC service outlet for the service terminal v AC service outlets for each ESSNet console components __ 9. v Unpack the 2105 and use the ship group parts list to verify all items were received. v Verify the cluster to cluster ethernet cable (RJ45) is installed. v Give the CUSTOMER SOFTWARE ENCLOSED envelope to the customer. Attention: If you are installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following checks. The serial number shown on the Expansion Enclosure packaging material and the Expansion Enclosure operator panel must be the same as the 2105 Model 800. Do not continue with the installation if the serial numbers are different. __ 10. __ 11. Inspect for shipping damage. Perform the Safety Inspection if the 2105 subsystem was previously installed and not leased from or maintained by IBM. Inspect for Shipping Damage on page 173 Safety Inspection on page 174 Verify the Ship Group is Complete on page 173
167
168
169
Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine
This procedure will guide you to determine if LIC Features have been ordered for this machine and, if needed, make a LIC Feature Control diskette. Notes: 1. LIC feature diskettes may have been provided in the ship group or in a separate MES. You should always use the following procedure to download the latest version from ViewBlue. 2. The LIC Feature Control Records diskette will be used at a later time during installation configuration. Requirements: v PC with WEB Browser and diskette drive v DOS formatted 1.44 MB, 3.5 inch diskette Attention: the ESS diskette drive only reads 1.44 MB formatted diskettes that were formatted by a 1.44 MB drive. Procedure: __ 1. Bring up IBM ViewBlue with the following URL: http://w3.viewblue.ibm.com __ 2. At the IBM ViewBlue Information and Services Logon screen, do the following. a. Select your Country b. Enter your IBM employee Serial Number. c. Click the Logon box __ 3. If you get an informational screen, click on Continue. __ 4. At the IBM Public Information and Services Main Menu, do the following.
170
171
172
I/O Drawer 1
I/O Drawer 2
Front View
__ 5. Place the ship group parts list at the end of this manual for use during removal of the 2105 Model 800. __ 6. Continue with Inspect for Shipping Damage.
173
Safety Inspection
__ 1. Perform the safety inspection if the 2105 Model 800 was previously installed and was not previously leased from IBM or maintained by IBM service support representatives. See Safety Inspection in chapter 12 of Volume 3, to perform this inspection. __ 2. Continue with Labeling and Routing the Cables for a 2105 Subsystem.
__ 2. __ 3.
__ 4. __ 5.
174
__ 4. Install the decorative top hat onto the top of the 2105 Model 800: a. Lift the top hat onto the top of the 2105 Model 800, position it with IBM logo placed to the front left of the machine 2 [Figure 173]. b. Open the front and rear covers of the 2105 Model 800. c. Install the six screws (three on each side) 3 up through the holes in the frame 4 into the threaded holes in the top hat.
s008406m
175
Front
4
(6 holes)
3
(6 screws)
Front
Figure 173. Top Hat Installation (s009553)
__ 5. Unroll the mainline power cables from the ship group. __ 6. Verify that all front and rear internal power and signal cables are connected. Attention: Do not connect any external cables to the 2105 Model 800 until you are instructed to do so. __ 7. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Remove the two tailgate bar mounting screws 6 [Figure 174] then remove the bar 5 . __ 8. Feed both mainline power cables down through the center of the 2105 Model 800 5 [Figure 174] to the customers power connectors. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3.
176
(2 Screws)
Front View
Figure 174. 2105 Model 800 Mainline Power Cable Installation (S009121)
177
__ A. __ 3.
Check the ground continuity of the 2105 Check 2105 Mainline Power Cable plug in mainline power cables. Ground Continuity (Plug in) on Note: Measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is page 180 good. Check the customer receptacles ground pin voltage and continuity, with the customers CB off (plug in). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Resistance measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is good. Check Customer Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity With Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 182
__ 4.
178
__ 6.
Check the customer receptacles voltage Check Customer Receptacle pins, with the customers CB on (plug in). Voltage Pins with Customer CB On Note: Measured voltages must match the (Plug in) on page 188 voltage on the 2105 information label. Continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings on page 202.
__ 7.
__ B. __ 3.
Check the ground continuity of the 2105 Check 2105 Mainline Power Cable wired mainline power cables. Ground Continuity (Wired) on page Note: Measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is 191 good. Check the customer receptacles ground pin voltage and continuity, with the customers CB off (wired). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Resistance measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is good. Check the customer receptacles voltage pins, with the customers CB off (wired). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Check Customer Ground Continuity with Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 194
__ 4.
__ 5.
__ 6.
Check the customer receptacles voltage Check Customer Voltage with pins, with the customers CB on (wired). Customer CB On (Wired) on page Note: Measured voltages must match the 199 voltage on the 2105 information label. Continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings on page 202.
__ 7.
179
J1 J2 J3 J4 CB00
J5A
J5B J6
__ 4. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Connect each mainline power cable to its input connector on the line cord bracket connector: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket connector next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 2 [Figure 176] v PPS 2, 3 [Figure 176]
180
__ 5. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less resistance. For connection information, see Figure 177 on page 182. Place one lead of the multimeter on each ground pin of the male plug on the mainline power cable. Place the other lead on the conductive metal of each primary power supply enclosure. v Good: If there is 1.0 ohm or less resistance, go to Check Customer Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity With Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 182. v Bad: If there is more than 1.0 ohm resistance, go to MAP 2031: Repairing Ground Continuity in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
181
2105
Meter
Ohm
3 30/50 A
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
Figure 177. Ground Continuity Check, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009626)
Check Customer Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity With Customer CB Off (Plug in)
This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that there is no voltage present at either outlet when both outlet circuit breakers are off. __ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 179 on page 183.
182
2105
Meter
Vac
3 30/50 A
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
183
Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)
Figure 180. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634)
__ 2. Voltage is present at a customer outlet with both outlet circuit breakers off. DANGER Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. (1003) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Inform the customer that voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the ground pin of the failing customer voltage outlet. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance. For connection information, refer to Figure 181 on page 185. Measure the resistance between the customer ac power outlet ground pin on each mainline power cable and the building ground. A reading of 1.0 ohm or less shows a safe, continuous grounding conductor. v Good: If the measured resistance at the ground pin is 1.0 ohm or less, continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 185. v Bad: If the measured resistance is more than 1.0 ohm on the connector, inform the customer. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.
184
2105
Meter
Ohm
3 30/50 A
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)
Figure 182. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634)
Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in)
__ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 183 on page 187.
185
v Good: If all measured voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) at the voltage pins on the female connector or at the customers ac power outlet (female) are less than 1.0 V ac, continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB On (Plug in) on page 188. v Bad: If any measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing wired ac mainline power cable voltage pins or the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.
186
2105
A
Vac
3 30/50 A
B C B C
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
B A C A
B C
Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)
Figure 184. Three Phase Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009635)
__ 2. Continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB On (Plug in) on page 188.
187
188
2105
A
Vac
3 30/50 A
B C B C
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB ON
C Vac
__ 4. Record the voltages measured, record the voltages in Table 16 on page 190.
189
__ 5. Continue with the next step. __ 6. Verify ac input voltages from Table 16 are correct. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the ac input voltage just measured matches the machine input voltage information on this label. Does the voltage measured match the voltage on the 2105 information label? v Yes, continue with step 7. v No, inform the customer if the voltage is outside this range. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. __ 7. Switch OFF each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. __ 8. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers manual. __ 9. Connect the mainline power cables: Note: Determine if the customer will be providing an UPS (uninterruptable power system) and how many UPS connections (one or two) will be available for this frame: v If only one UPS connection is available for this frame, verify the UPS is connected to mainline power cable 1. The 390 V batteries are only charged by the primary power supply attached to mainline power cable 1. v If two UPS connections are available for this frame, connect each UPS to a mainline power cable (1 or 2). v Connect each plug in mainline power cable to each customer ac power outlet. __ 10. Go to step 10 on page 202.
190
J1 J2 J3 J4 CB00
J5A
J5B J6
__ 4. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Connect each mainline power cable to its input connector on the line cord bracket connector: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket connector next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 2 [Figure 188] v PPS 2, 3 [Figure 188]
191
__ 5. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less resistance. For connection information, refer to Figure 189 on page 193. Place one lead of the multimeter on the green and yellow wire at the customer end of each mainline power cable. Place the other lead on the conductive metal of each primary power supply enclosure. v Good: If there is 1.0 ohm or less resistance, continue with step 6 on page 193. v Bad: If there is more than 1.0 ohm resistance, go to MAP 2031: Repairing Ground Continuity in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
192
2105
Meter
Ohm
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
Figure 189. Ground Continuity Check with Wired Mainline, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009405)
__ 6. Disconnect each wired mainline power cable 4 [Figure 190] from the line cord bracket.
193
Front View
__ 7. Instruct the customer to call a licensed electrician to connect each wired mainline power cable to the customer mainline power source. Attention: For EMEA installations, review the information in EMEA Electrician Information on page 194, then return here and continue. __ 8. Continue with Check Customer Ground Continuity with Customer CB Off (Wired).
194
2105
Meter
Vac
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
195
Ground
__ 2. Voltage is present at a customer outlet with both outlet circuit breakers off. DANGER Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. (1003) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Inform the customer that voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the ground pin of the failing wired ac mainline power cable. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance. For connection information, see Figure 193 on page 197. Measure the resistance between the female connector ground pin and the building ground. A reading of 1.0 ohm or less shows a safe, continuous grounding conductor. v Good: If the measured resistance at the ground pin is 1.0 ohm or less, continue with Check Customer Voltage with Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 197. v Bad: If the measured resistance is more than 1.0 ohm on the connector, inform the customer. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.
196
2105
Meter
Ohm
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
Ground
197
v Good: If all measured voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) at the voltage pins on the female connector or at the customers ac power outlet (female) are less than 1.0 V ac, continue with Check Customer Voltage with Customer CB On (Wired) on page 199. v Bad: If any measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing wired ac mainline power cable voltage pins or the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.
2105
A B
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
198
C Vac
199
2105
Meter
Vac
A
Good: Correct Input Voltage Fail: Incorrect Input Voltage
Customer AC Power
CB ON
C Vac
__ 4. Record the voltages measured, record the voltages in Table 19 on page 201.
200
__ 5. Continue with the next step. __ 6. Verify ac input voltages from Table 19 are correct. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the ac input voltage just measured matches the machine input voltage information on this label. Does the voltage measured match the voltage on the 2105 information label? v Yes, continue with step 7. v No, inform the customer if the voltage is outside this range. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. __ 7. Switch OFF each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. __ 8. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers manual. __ 9. Connect the mainline power cables: Note: Determine if the customer will be providing an UPS (uninterruptable power system) and how many UPS connections (one or two) will be available for this frame: v If only one UPS connection is available for this frame, verify the UPS is connected to mainline power cable 1. The 390 V batteries are only charged by the primary power supply attached to mainline power cable 1. v If two UPS connections are available for this frame, connect each UPS to a mainline power cable (1 or 2). v Connect each wired mainline power cable to each connector on the line cord bracket. Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket connector next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 1 [Figure 199] v PPS 2, 2 [Figure 199]
201
__ 10. Reinstall the frame tailgate bar (center) removed earlier, see 5 [Figure 174]. __ 11. Do you have a 2105 Expansion Enclosure to install to this 2105 Model 800? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings. __ 12. MES instructions are required if the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and 2105 Model 800 were not built/configured as a subsystem by IBM manufacturing. Was this 2105 Expansion Enclosure and the 2105 Model 800 built and shipped together from IBM manufacturing? v Yes, go to Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure with 2105 Model 800 on page 264. v No, the MES guided install of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure cannot be done now. The MES install can be started at either of the following 2105 Model 800 install steps: After the 2105 Model 800 install is complete and turned over to customer use. Just before Certify DDMs on page 252, as you continue with the 2105 Model 800 install. Delay the MES install and continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings.
202
Note: To access the UEPO Local/Remote switch, you will need to loosen the single screw on the left side of the operator panel and swing the operator panel out. Pull the Local/Remote switch out before changing its position.
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency
REMOTE
Local Power
Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Front View Rear View
Front View
__ 2. Go to the rear of the 2105 Model 800. Verify that the power switches on all eight CEC and I/O drawer power supplies and the four host bay power supplies 2 [Figure 201] and 3 are set to On (up). Note: Later versions of the CEC and I/O drawer power supplies may have the switch removed or covered up. __ 3. Verify that the power switches on all of the installed storage cage power supplies 1 [Figure 201] are set to On (up).
203
1 1
Power Switch
ON CHK/ PWR-GOOD
OFF
Power Switch
Figure 201. Electronics and Storage Cage Power Supply Switches (s009169)
__ 4. Verify that the five circuit breakers (CB01 to CB05) on each primary power supply 4 [Figure 202] are set to On (up). __ 5. The main circuit breakers 5 [Figure 202] on each primary power supply should be set to Off (down).
Rear View
__ 6. Set the Power Select switch 8 [Figure 203] and 9 on each RPC switch card to the Local position (down).
204
RPC-1 Card
RPC-2 Card
AUTO or REMOTE
7
LOCAL
Rear View
__ 8. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. __ 9. Instruct the customer to switch on each circuit breaker that supplies the mainline ac power to each customer ac power outlet or wired mainline power cable. __ 10. Verify that all the 390 V battery cables are connected at battery 1 (three cables) 2 [Figure 204] and battery 2 (one cable) 1 : v Battery 1, J1A to PPS 1, J5A v Battery 1, J1B to PPS 1, J5B
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
205
Battery 2
Battery 1
Rear View
Figure 204. 2105 Model 800 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (s009128)
__ 2. Switch the System Power CB 4 [Figure 205] on the rear of each primary power supply to On (up).
Rear View
Figure 205. Primary Power Supply (s009616)
__ 3. Continue with How to Power on and Test the 2105 Subsystem on page 207.
206
This section does the following: v Checks that the cluster to cluster ethernet jumper cable is installed v Checks the 2105 UEPO and power supplies v Connects the service terminal to the 2105 v Installs the 2105 subsystem using the service terminal
I/O Drawer 1
I/O Drawer 2
Front View
207
Step
__ 2.
__ 3.
__ 4.
__ 5. __ 6.
__ 7.
__ 8.
Observe each 2105 Model LEDs ON 800 CEC drawer power supplies CHK/PWR-GOOD LED (left and right sets of two power supplies). Observe each 2105 Model LEDs ON 800 I/O drawer power supplies CHK/PWR-GOOD LED (left and right sets of two power supplies). LEDs ON
__ 9.
__ 10. Observe each 2105 Model 800 host bay power supplies three green power LEDs (left and right sets of two power supplies) . __ 11. Observe each storage cage power supplies CHK/PWR-GOOD LED (EE also). __ 12. Observe each primary power supplies PWR Good LED (front of 2105 subsystem, EE also). __ 13. Observe each primary power supplies digital status display (EE also). __ 14. Continue with Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem on page 214.
LEDs ON (green)
LEDs ON
208
Local Power
Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2
__ 4. Observe the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 and perform the action described in Table 22. If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, observe the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 using Table 49 on page 307. Then return here and continue. Attention: If the 2105 powers on, the Unit Emergency switch is not working. You must repair the problem before continuing, see MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
Table 22. 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators Power Complete, Line Cord 1 Off Blinking Power Complete, Line Cord 2 Off Blinking Action
Normal, go to step 5 on page 210 Go to MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
On
On
On
Off
209
Go to MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
__ 5. Set the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Unit Emergency switch to On (up). If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, set the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel Unit Emergency switch to On (up). __ 6. Set the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Local Power switch to On (up), then release it. You may have to wait up to four minutes for the final state of the Power Complete and Line Cord indicators (indicators stop blinking and remain on). Note: This power sequence testing does not require waiting for IML to complete.
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency
Local Power
Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2
__ 7. Observe the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 [Figure 208] and perform the action described in Table 23 on page 211. If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, observe the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 using Table 50 on page 307. Then return here and continue.
210
Normal, go to step 8. Go to MAP 2400: Local Power On in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2400: Local Power On in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2400: Local Power On in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
Off
On
Off or blinking
Off or blinking
__ 8. Go to the rear of the 2105 Model 800. Observe the CHK/PWR-GOOD indicator on the right two CEC drawer power supplies 3 [Figure 209] and the left two CEC drawer power supplies 2 . Perform the action described in Table 24 for each set of two power supplies.
Power Switch
1 2
6 CHK/PWR
GOOD Indicator
3 4
5
ON CHK/ PWR-GOOD
OFF
Power Switch
Rear View
7 CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicator
Figure 209. CEC Drawer, I/O Drawer, and Host Bay Power Supply Indicators (s009209) Table 24. 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators Power Supply Action CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators 2 on 1 on, 1 off 2 off Normal, go to step 9. Delay repair, go to 9. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
__ 9. Go to the rear of the 2105 Model 800. Observe the CHK/PWR-GOOD indicator on the right two I/O drawer power supplies 4 [Figure 209] and
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
211
__ 10. Go to the rear of the 2105 Model 800. Observe the four green power indicators 10 on the right two host bay power supplies 9 [Figure 210] and the left two host bay power supplies 8 . Verify that for each set of two power supplies, that at least one POWER ON HA1 and one POWER ON HA2 indicator is On. Perform the action described in Table 26 on page 213 for each set of two power supplies. Note: These indicators are labeled, POWER ON HA1, POWER ON HA2, and INPUT 11, and INPUT 12.
R1
Rear View
10 Power On
Indicators Power Switch
212
Normal, go to step 11 Delay repair, go to 11. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
__ 11. Observe the CHK/PWR-GOOD (check/power) indicator 6 [Figure 209], on the installed storage cage power supplies 1 . Perform the action described in Table 27. Note: The label above the supplies may read Storage Bay Power Supply instead of Storage Cage Power Supply (which is the real FRU name).
Table 27. 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators Power Supply Action CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators all on (green) only 1 off/amber 2 or more off/amber Normal, go to step 12 Delay repair, go to 12. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
__ 12. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Observe the PWR Good indicator 12 [Figure 211], on the front of both primary power supplies 1 and 2 11 and perform. Perform the action described in Table 28 on page 214. If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Observe the PWR Good indicator on the front of both primary power supplies 1 and 2 using Table 52 on page 308. Then return here and continue.
PPS 1/2
.
J8 J9
Front View
12
PWR GOOD Indicator
13
PPS Digital Status Display
Front View
11
213
Normal, go to step 13 Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
__ 13. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800 11 . Observe the PPS digital status display 13 [Figure 211], on primary power supplies 1 and 2. v If both digital displays are blank, go to step 14. Note: A blank digital status display may appear as an 88 due to the back-lighting of the LCDs. v If one or both status display is NOT blank, go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1, to isolate the problem. Note: When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, repeat the above for its primary power supplies. __ 14. Continue with Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem.
Step
__ 2.
214
Step
__ 3.
__ 4. __ 5. __ 6.
Login to cluster 2 (right). Login to cluster 1 (left). Continue with Installing the 2105 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal on page 218.
__ 2. Press the latches on the front service terminal table 1 [Figure 212] and pull the table out until it stops.
41
Front View
Figure 212. Accessing the Service Terminal Table (s009131)
__ 3. Place the service terminal on the service terminal table. __ 4. Connect the service terminal to the customers power outlet. Note: Always operate the service terminal from ac power because the duration of the service activity may exceed the capacity of the service terminal battery. __ 5. Connect the service terminal null modem cable (P/N 08L8045, in the ship group), to cluster 2 (right):
215
Front View
__ 6. Power the service terminal on and verify that the service terminal has been configured for use on the 2105 subsystem, see Service Terminal Setup in chapter 8 of Volume 3. __ 7. Wait for both cluster 1 and cluster 2 to complete the IML and for the Cluster LCD panel to display: READY FOR LOGIN. This will typically take 15 to 20 minutes for the first IML during install. Notes: a. You may notice an LCD display which says NVS Battery Test is turned off. This is normal for the first IML during install and is done to save time. The test will be turned back on automatically for subsequent IMLs. b. The READY FOR LOGIN display may be overwritten by NVS x BATTERY CHARGING. This is normal and you should continue with the next step. c. The READY FOR LOGIN display may be overwritten by a blank. You should continue with the next step. d. If the rack has been powered on for just a short time, then you could start unpacking and installing the ESSNet hardware to make use of this waiting time (refer toBegin Installation and Connection to the ESSNet on page 220). Return to this step as soon as both clusters 1 and 2 display READY FOR LOGIN. Did both cluster 1 and 2 display READY FOR LOGIN, NVS BAT x CHARGING or remain blank? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, if the rack has been powered on more then 45 minutes, go to MAP 4360: CEC Drawer Operator Panel Codes in chapter 3 of Volume 1. __ 8. Verify that the Copyright and Login screen is displayed for cluster 2: v If the copyright screen is displayed for cluster 2, continue with the next step.
216
__ 13.
__ 14.
217
218
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
ess1c1 ess1c2 ess2c1 ess2c2 ess3c1 ess3c2 ess4c1 ess4c2 ess5c1 ess5c2 ess6c1 ess6c2 ess7c1 ess7c2
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
[essnet1] [essnet2]
[172.31.1.250] [172.31.1.250]
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
219
This section describes the actions that will be done after you complete the installation using the service terminal.
SST
SuperSerial Technology
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON LINE
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15 16 13 14 11 12 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2
Rear View
Figure 214. MSA and Modem Expander Attachment Diagram (s009415)
v If the console has a Multiport Serial Adapter (MSA), you have a Master Console, continue with the next step. v If the console has a modem expander, you have an ESSNet1. To install the ESSNet1, go to MAP 1610: ESSNet1 Console Modem and Modem Expander in chapter 3 of Volume 1. __ 5. Is the Master Console already installed
220
__ 3. Place all of the following components together within 12 meters (40 feet) of the 2105 being installed: v MSA 8 [Figure 215] v Master Console PC 6 [Figure 215] v Modem 1 [Figure 215] v Ethernet hub (Newer version may use an Ethernet switch instead of an Ethernet hub.) __ 4. Verify that the components are within 2 meters (6 feet) of the AC service outlets. Verify that the MSA is within 1 meter (3 feet) of the PC.
221
Customer AC Service
1
Modem Line DTE
8 4
Power Power S1 Master Console Port 2 Port 1 S3
MSA
10 S3
11
12
Telephone Line
__ 5. Install the Master Console PC (monitor, mouse, and keyboard) using the documentation that came with the hardware being used as the Master Console. Do not power the Master Console on. __ 6. Check that the voltage setting for the input power (115V or 230V) is correct for the Master Console. The switch is above the power connector on the rear of the PC. Do not power the Master Console on. __ 7. Continue with Install the Modem.
Front View
__ 3. Plug the 25-pin end of the data cable 3 [Figure 215], into the DTE connector 14 [Figure 217] on the back of the modem. __ 4. Plug the 9-pin end of the data cable into Serial Port 1 (S1) on the back of the Master Console PC 6 [Figure 215]. Tighten the cable connector retention screws.
222
13
Microcom DeskPorte Modem Parallel Port Power DTE
14
15
Line
Phone
Rear View
13
MultiTech MultiModem-V90
PHONE LINE EIA RS232C
VOLUME
Rear View
15
14 13
MultiTech MultiModem-V92
PHONE LINE LEASED EIA RS232C
VOLUME
POWER
Rear View
15
Figure 217. Modem Rear View (s009711)
14
Plug the other end of the modem power adapter cable into the customers AC service outlet. __ 8. Is the modem you are attaching a Microcom DeskPorte Modem? v Yes, go to step 12 on page 224. v No, continue with the next step. __ 9. Use figure Figure 217 to determine which type of MultiTech MultiModem was supplied (V-90 or V-92). v If you have a MultiTech MultiModem - V90, go to step 10 on page 224. v If you have a MultiTech MultiModem - V92, go to step 11 on page 224.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
__ 7.
223
224
Front View
21
MultiTech MultiModem
Power
Front View
21
Figure 218. Modem Front Panel Locations (S008412l)
16
1
SuperSerial Technology
SST
9
17
2
ON LINE 10
18
3 11 4 12
13
14
15
16
225
__ 3.
__ 4.
Power on and connect the Master Console to the ethernet hub. Note: Verify the LIC code installed on the Master Console is at the same level as the Master Console LIC CD-ROM in the ship group. Continue with Configuring the Master Console on page 231.
__ 5.
226
I/O Drawer 1
I/O Drawer 2
19
Front View
20
__ 6. Go to Routing the Ethernet Cables to the Ethernet Hub on page 228. __ 7. Connect cluster 1 11 [Figure 215] to MSA port 1: v Plug the null-modem cable connector labeled CLUSTER S3 10 [Figure 215], into the cluster 1, S3 connector 19 [Figure 220], on the front of cluster 1. v Plug the other end of the cable labeled MODEM EXPANDER into Port 1 17 [Figure 219], on the top of the MSA. __ 8. Connect cluster 2 12 [Figure 215] to MSA port 2: v Plug the null-modem cable connector labeled CLUSTER S3 9 [Figure 215] to the S3 connector 20 [Figure 220] on the front of cluster 2. v Plug the other end of the cable labeled MODEM EXPANDER into Port 2 18 [Figure 219], on the top of the MSA. Attention: Both clusters must be connected to the MSA for the 2105 service strategy to work.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
227
228
Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector 10/100 ESSNET* Ethernet RJ45 cable Ethernet Hub 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X
Master Console
IBM
9X
10X
11X
12X 13X
14X
15X 16 MDI-X 16 MDI MDI PORT Customer Port (non-crossover) Customer Port (crossover)
MDI-X PORTS Front View 2105 Subsystem #1 Cluster 2 I/O Drawer 10/100
Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector * Note: See table for recommended plugging of additional 2105 subsystem connections to the Ethernet Hub
8X
Crossover
16 Ethernet Switch
Figure 221. Ethernet Hub Locations (s009615)
__ 5. Continue with Power on, and Connect the Master Console to the Ethernet Hub.
Power on, and Connect the Master Console to the Ethernet Hub
__ 1. Is the Master Console already installed? v Yes, go to Configuring the Master Console on page 231. v No, continue with the next step. __ 2. Check that the voltage setting for the input power (115V or 230V) is correct for the Master Console. The switch is above the power connector on the rear of the PC. __ 3. Power on the Master Console PC (monitor, mouse, and keyboard) using the documentation that came with the hardware being used as the Master Console. Note: If the Master Console fails to power on and boot, go to MAP 1600: ESSNet Console Problem in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
229
230
Login
__ 1. At the Master Console Login window, log in using the userid of service and the default password of service (or the locally assigned password). __ 2. Close the Message of the Day window. __ 3. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click the Console Launcher icon. __ 4. At the Master Console Launcher screen, type in the password service and then click the Connect button. Note: It will take a few seconds until it comes up. __ 5. At the Localhost: Hardware Management Console screen, click on Console Actions in the Views frame. __ 6. Is the Master Console already installed ? v Yes, go to step Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster on page 233. v No, continue with the next step. __ 7. Continue with Initial Network Settings.
__ 5. __ 6. __ 7. __ 8. __ 9.
231
__ 3. __ 4. __ 5. __ 6. __ 7.
232
233
__ 4. __ 5. __ 6. __ 7.
__ 8. __ 9.
Connect the 2105 to the Ethernet Hub and Configure Cluster and Master Console IP Addresses
Attention: The 2105 and cables in this procedure are ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during this procedure. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Use the Communication Resources Worksheets (appendix A) to set the ESS configuration settings that the customer has indicated. __ 1. Disconnect the cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable 1 [Figure 222] from both I/O drawers. Leave the cable in the 2105. Note: Cluster to cluster communication will be restored in the following steps.
I/O Drawer 1
I/O Drawer 2
Front View
__ 2. Connect an Ethernet RJ45 cable to the 10/100 BaseT (RJ45) connector on each I/O drawer, see Figure 221 on page 229.
234
235
Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector 10/100 ESSNET* Ethernet RJ45 cable Ethernet Hub 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X
Master Console
IBM
9X
10X
11X
12X 13X
14X
15X 16 MDI-X 16 MDI MDI PORT Customer Port (non-crossover) Customer Port (crossover)
MDI-X PORTS Front View 2105 Subsystem #1 Cluster 2 I/O Drawer 10/100
Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector * Note: See table for recommended plugging of additional 2105 subsystem connections to the Ethernet Hub
8X
Crossover
16 Ethernet Switch
Figure 223. Ethernet Hub Locations (s009615)
__ 3. Verify that the Port Link LED is lit when each Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet hub. Are both Link LEDs lit when the two cables are connected? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, there is a problem with the Ethernet hub, Ethernet cables, or the I/O drawer planar assembly FRU in the cluster. Repair or replace, as required, and then continue with the next step. Note: Verify that the 2105 cluster is powered on. __ 4. Configure the 2105 for the Master Console attachment. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Master Console Host Name and IP Address
236
__ 5.
__ 6. __ 7. __ 8. __ 9. __ 10.
__ 11. Enter the Cluster IP Address for each cluster of the ESS that you are attaching to this Master Console. Note: It is recommended that the IP Addresses be entered in the same sequence that the cables are attached to the MSA ports. Future isolation will be much easier if the sequence is the same. __ 12. Click the OK button. __ 13. Verify that steps 10 through 12 have been done for each ESS subsystem attached to the Ethernet hub. __ 14. Click the Apply button. Was N/A returned in one or more columns? v Yes, this indicates that the Master Console cannot communicate with the subsystem. Check the network settings for both the ESS and Master Console. For additional diagnostic tests and help, go to Test Subsystem Communication on page 388. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. v No, continue with the next step. __ 15. Click the OK button. __ 16. Continue with Verifying the Master Console Network Setup
237
__ 6. __ 7. __ 8. __ 9.
__ 10. __ 11.
__ 2. __ 3. __ 4. __ 5. __ 6. __ 7.
__ 8.
238
239
240
Configure E-Mail
Note: The following actions must be performed on both clusters. __ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu E-Mail Menu Change / Show Error Notification Count Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select one of the following: Smart-Host Relay Menu - Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select: - Change Local E-Mail Configuration
241
Configure SNMP
__ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu SNMP Menu Change / Show SNMP Configuration Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. Add SNMP Trap Destination Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. __ 2. Continue with Configure Pager Users.
242
243
__ 3.
EQUINOX
SST
SuperSerial Technology
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON LINE
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15 16 13 14 11 12 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2
Rear View
Figure 224. MSA and Modem Expander Diagram (s009415)
__ 4. Have you already used customer supplied TCP/IP information to configure the ESS clusters and Master Console? v Yes, go to step 5. v No, go to Master Console Configuration for Customer Network. __ 5. Did the customer supply Gateway or Nameserver information? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to Connect and Test the Customer Network Connection on page 247. __ 6. Are you sure that the Gateway or Nameserver information was entered on both ESS clusters and the Master Console? v Yes, go to Connect and Test the Customer Network Connection on page 247. v No, go to Master Console Configuration for Customer Network.
244
__ b. __ c. __ d.
__ e.
Note: Pressing F3 will cause the daemons to restart and may take up to 10 minutes to complete. __ 2. Update the Master Console TCP/IP information per the customer provided Communication Resource worksheets. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communication Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Master Console Host Name and IP Address After the warning screen is presented:
245
246
247
248
Front View
249
250
This section describes the actions that you will do to complete the installation of the 2105. That includes DDM certification, logical configuration, install reporting, final checks and customer hand-over. Determine the process to be used to complete the installation of the 2105. Use Table 35 to determine the steps required to complete the installation.
Table 35. Install Completion Process Conditions The logical configuration will not be built by the IBM service representative or no logical configuration information was provided. The logical configuration was supplied on an ISA diskette. The logical configuration was produced on a diskette using the Copy Services Option of Duplicating the configuration of an ESS Subsystem. The logical configuration information was supplied on Configuration Planner Worksheets only. Table 36. Logical Configuration will be not be performed by SR Task Certify the DDMs Perform additional testing of retain connection Route and connect host system cables For Reference Information, Go to Certify DDMs on page 252 Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) on page 253 Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254 Finish the Install on page 259 Perform the actions in Table Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 on page 252 Table 38 on page 252
Table 37. Logical Configuration Import from ISA Diskette Task Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Perform additional testing of retain connection Route and connect host system cables For Reference Information, Go to Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA on page 258 Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) on page 253 Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254 Finish the Install on page 259
251
Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) on page 253 Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254 Finish the Install on page 259
Certify DDMs
__ 1. Check that all DDM drawers are formatted. Connect the service terminal to the working cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu DDM Bay (Drawer) Menu Format DDM Bays (Drawers) Did you see the message, There are no device drawers needing format? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, take the option to Format All Drawers Listed. When the format has completed, continue with the next step. __ 2. Will the DDM certify be run overnight or will you be leaving the customer site? v Yes, perform a background certify using the Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA option. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Enterprise Storage Server Menu Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Menu Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Set Certify DDMs to Yes and Import and build logical config from ISA to No. When you return to the site, continue with step 7 on page 253. v No, continue with the next step. __ 3. It is recommended that you use the Master Console (MC) instead of the service terminal to certify the DDMs. The certify process requires that the terminal emulator session for service login, stays connected until certify is complete. If you choose to use your service terminal, it will have to stay connected to the 2105 until the certify is completed. This process will normally take between 35 minutes and 2 hours, depending on the machines configuration (number of DDM bays, DDM capacity, and DDM speed).
252
Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only)
Note: Data is sent to RETAIN using two protocols. One for problem notification, and one for data upload (PE packages, dumps or traces). Both protocols should be tested. The data can be sent to Retain via the Modem or the IBM Intranet (Internal IBM accounts). 1. Log into the master console with the user service and the password as previously set (the default is service). 2. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click on the Console Launcher icon. 3. Click on the Console Actions icon. 4. Double-click the Console Status icon on the Console Actions frame. The Console Status window is displayed.
253
Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System
Attention: The 2105 and cables in this procedure are ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during this procedure. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4.
Cluster 1
Cluster 2
Front View
Figure 226. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Locations (S009141)
__ 1. Label the SCSI, ESCON, and Fibre host cables from each customer host adapter. Route the cables (referenced in the Configuration Worksheets) to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Note: To allow correct connection and disconnection of external cables, cables should be labeled using the customers current cable-identification plan and the labels provided by your customer. __ 2. Verify that the customer has installed and configured the system software changes at the host that are needed to support the 2105 Model 800 subsystem attachment. __ 3. Identify the 2105 Model 800 host bay that the host cables from the host will be attached to using the Configuration Worksheets from either the: v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries book, form number SC26-7476 or
254
255
Host Bays
R1-B1
R1-B2
R1-B3
R1-B4
Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4
ZA ZB
ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01
Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A
Figure 227. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (S009135)
Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) __ 5. Verify that all of the signal and interface cables that enter the 2105 Model 800 are retained by the tailgate cable clamps: v Cluster 1 tailgate, 1 [Figure 228] v Cluster 2 tailgate, 2 [Figure 228] Verify that the tailgate hardware is installed correctly. See 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316.
256
Front View
Figure 228. Tailgate Cable Strain Relief Clamps (S009143)
Are you using the Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA process? v Yes, continue with Finish the Install on page 259. v No, continue with the next step. __ 7. Have you been asked to enter or build the logical configuration for the customer? v Yes, continue with Logical Configurations. v No, continue with Finish the Install on page 259. END OF INSTALL PHASE 4:
__ 6.
Logical Configurations
START OF INSTALL PHASE 5:
Attention: You must wait for the Certify DDMs process to complete, then continue with the next step. __ 1. Do you have a diskette produced on another ESS using Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem? v Yes, go to Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem on page 391. a. Verify that all steps under Source ESS Subsystem Requirements on page 391 and Target ESS Subsystem Requirements on page 392 were done previously. b. Follow Duplicate the Configuration on the Target ESS Subsystem on page 393 to import the logical configuration.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
257
258
Front View
Figure 229. Tailgate Cable Strain Relief Clamps (S009145)
3. Set the Local/Remote switches on both RPC cards to the power control mode that the customer requires:
259
RPC-1 Card
RPC-2 Card
AUTO or REMOTE
LOCAL
Rear View
4. Place the following items in the front and rear document enclosures for future reference and use: v Copies of the configuration worksheets v Spare ship group components v CD-ROMs v Spare labels v Cable planning worksheets v Host card wrap tools 5. Reference the pack/unpack instructions for return/discard information. Discard the shipping material locally. 6. Did you use the Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA process? v Yes, continue with Finish the Install (Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA) on page 261.
260
Front View
Figure 231. Storing the Service Terminal Table (S009144)
10. Complete all installation records. 11. Update the account records to include this installation. Installation is Complete: the installation of the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server is now complete. The 2105 is now ready for the installation of additional features, ECs, MESes, or to give the machine to the customer. Verify that you charge any additional time to the correct service code. Do not charge the additional time to the 2105 installation. END OF INSTALL PHASE 6:
Finish the Install (Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA)
1. Verify that you completed steps 1 on page 259 to 5 on page 260 of Finish the Install. 2. Logon to the service terminal. Were you sent directly to a monitor display panel?
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
261
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
262
263
Checking Worksheets
__ 1. To avoid confusion and delays during the install process, verify that the IBM Marketing Representative or the IBM Business Partner has worked with the customer to fill out the Communications and Configuration Worksheets. Verify that the customer has filled out the Communication Resources Worksheets and the Configuration Worksheets for the 2105 Model 800 being installed. For the Communication Resources worksheets, refer to the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide book, form number GC26-7444. For the Configuration Worksheets, refer to either the: v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries book, form number SC26-7476 or v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for Open-System book, form number SC26-7477 __ 2. Continue with Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure with 2105 Model 800.
264
v Correct cooling airflow and temperature __ 3. Unpack the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and use the ship group parts list to verify all items were received. Attention: If you are installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following checks. The serial number shown on the Expansion Enclosure packaging material and the Expansion Enclosure operator panel must be the same as the 2105 Model 800. Do not continue with the installation if the serial numbers are different. __ 4. __ 5. Inspect for shipping damage. Perform the Safety Inspection if the 2105 Expansion Enclosure was previously installed and not leased from or maintained by IBM. Continue with How to Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure on page 266. Inspect for Shipping Damage on page 266 Safety Inspection on page 266
__ 6.
265
Safety Inspection
__ 1. Perform the safety inspection if the 2105 Expansion Enclosure was previously installed and was not previously leased from IBM or maintained by IBM service support representatives. See Safety Inspection in chapter 12 of Volume 3, to perform this inspection. __ 2. Continue with How to Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure.
266
267
FRONT
6 7 8
FRONT
268
10 9
11
FRONT
FRONT
12
__ 8. Locate the ground strap 13 on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Remove one of the ground strap mounting screws. Feed the loose ground strap through the frame spacer and attach it to the 2105 Model 800 frame.
269
13
Rear View
Figure 234. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Ground Strap Location (S008670m)
__ 9. Verify the cutout floor tiles beneath the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure allow access to the center tailgate area. __ 10. Install the wedge chocks 14 [Figure 172] (located in the ship group) on all four casters or, if caster locks are available, engage the caster locks on all casters.
14
__ 11. Install the decorative top hat onto the top of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure: a. Lift the top hat onto the top of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure, position it with IBM logo placed to the front left of the machine 15 . b. Open the front and rear covers of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. c. Install the six screws (three on each side) 17 up through the holes in the frame 16 into the threaded holes in the top hat.
270
Front
15
16
(6 holes)
17
(6 screws)
Front
Figure 236. Top Hat Installation (s009554)
__ 12. Go to the rear of the expansion enclosure and locate the 390 V battery set 18 at the bottom of the frame. There should be a Date of First Charge label under the right handle of each set of batteries. Locate the Date of First Charge label on one of the battery assemblies. If the label is not there, partially remove one of the battery assemblies to expose the label that should be on the battery top cover. See 390 V Battery Set Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure on page 135. Notes: a. Each 390 V battery set has information on a Date of First Charge label that needs to be entered into the functional code whenever batteries are replaced (or may be needed at install if the Expansion Enclosure was not tested with the 2105 Model 800. Record the date indicated on this label. b. Information from labels other than the Date of First Charge label should only be used when this label is missing.
271
18
Figure 238. 390 V Battery Locations (s009589)
__ 13. Continue with Checking for Feature Code 0970 (Weight Reduction).
272
1
Front View
2 (2 Screws)
Figure 239. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Mainline Power Cable Installation (S008662m)
273
__ A. __ 3.
Plug In - Customer Power Connections Check the ground continuity of the 2105 Check 2105 Expansion Enclosure plug in mainline power cables. Mainline Power Cable Ground Note: Measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is Continuity (Plug in) on page 276 good. Check the customer receptacles ground pin voltage and continuity, with the customers CB off (plug in). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Resistance measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is good. Check the customer receptacles voltage pins, with the customers CB off (plug in). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Check Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 278
__ 4.
__ 5.
Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 281
__ 6.
Check the customer receptacles voltage Check Customer Receptacle pins, with the customers CB on (plug in). Voltage Pins with the Customer CB Note: Measured voltages must match the On (Plug in) on page 284 voltage on the 2105 information label.
274
__ B. __ 3.
Wired - Customer Power Connections Check the ground continuity of the 2105 Check 2105 Expansion Enclosure wired mainline power cables. Mainline Power Cable Ground Note: Measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is Continuity (Wired) on page 287 good. Check the customer receptacles ground pin voltage and continuity, with the customers CB off (wired). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Resistance measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is good. Check the customer receptacles voltage pins, with the customers CB off (wired). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Check Customer Ground Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 290
__ 4.
__ 5.
Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 293
__ 6.
Check the customer receptacles voltage Check Customer Voltage with the pins, with the customers CB on (wired). Customer CB On (Wired) on page Note: Measured voltages must match the 295 voltage on the 2105 information label. Continue with Checking the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Switch Settings on page 298.
__ 7.
275
Check 2105 Expansion Enclosure Mainline Power Cable Ground Continuity (Plug in)
Attention: Use an IBM-approved analog multimeter. Do not use a digital meter. Attention: The 2105 Expansion Enclosure features two mainline power cables. Complete all steps of this section for both power sources and receptacles and for both power plugs, mainline power cables, and primary power supplies (PPS). __ 1. Switch off each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. __ 2. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. __ 3. Verify the system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 1 [Figure 240] on the rear of both primary power supplies is set to Off (down).
J1 J2 J3 J4 CB00
J5A
J5B J6
__ 4. Go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Connect each mainline power cable to its input connector on the line cord bracket connector: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 2 [Figure 241] v PPS 2, 3 [Figure 241]
276
PPS-1
PPS-2
Front View
__ 5. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less resistance. For connection information, see Figure 242 on page 278. Place one lead of the multimeter on each ground pin of the male plug on the mainline power cable. Place the other lead on the conductive metal of each primary power supply enclosure. v Good: If there is 1.0 ohm or less resistance, go to Check Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 278. v Bad: If there is more than 1.0 ohm resistance, go to MAP 2031: Repairing Ground Continuity in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
277
2105
Meter
Ohm
3 30/50 A
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
Figure 242. Ground Continuity Check, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009626)
Check Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Plug in)
This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that there is no voltage present at either outlet when both outlet circuit breakers are off. __ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 244 on page 279.
278
2105
Meter
Vac
3 30/50 A
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
279
Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)
Figure 245. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634)
__ 2. Voltage is present at a customer outlet with both outlet circuit breakers off. DANGER Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. (1003) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Inform the customer that voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the ground pin of the failing customer voltage outlet. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance. For connection information, refer to Figure 246 on page 281. Measure the resistance between the customer ac power outlet ground pin on each mainline power cable and the building ground. A reading of 1.0 ohm or less shows a safe, continuous grounding conductor. v Good: If the measured resistance at the ground pin is 1.0 ohm or less, continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 281. v Bad: If the measured resistance is more than 1.0 ohm on the connector, inform the customer. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.
280
2105
Meter
Ohm
3 30/50 A
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)
Figure 247. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634)
Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in)
__ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 248 on page 283.
281
v Good: If all measured voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) at the voltage pins on the female connector or at the customers ac power outlet (female) are less than 1.0 V ac, continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with the Customer CB On (Plug in) on page 284. v Bad: If any measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing wired ac mainline power cable voltage pins or the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.
282
2105
A
Vac
3 30/50 A
B C B C
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
B A C A
B C
Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)
Figure 249. Three-Phase Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009635)
__ 2. Continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with the Customer CB On (Plug in) on page 284.
283
Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with the Customer CB On (Plug in)
This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that the correct voltages are present at both outlets when the outlet circuit breakers are on. Always perform power checks with the recommended analog meter. Do not use a digital meter. __ 1. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. __ 2. Switch on each customer circuit breaker to supply mainline ac voltage to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to read line voltage AC. For connection information, refer to Figure 250 on page 285. DANGER Dangerous voltages may be present. Do not touch the internal parts (pins and connectors) of the mainline power cable plugs. (1006) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the ac voltage at the voltage pins of each customers ac power outlet when both 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breakers are on. See Table 42, record the measurements in Table 43 on page 286. Record the measured ac voltages in step 4 on page 285 then continue from there.
Table 42. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground
284
2105
A
Vac
3 30/50 A
B C B C
3 60 A
Customer AC Power
CB ON
C Vac
__ 4. Record the voltages measured, record the voltages in Table 43 on page 286.
285
__ 5. Continue with the next step. __ 6. Verify ac input voltages from Table 43 are correct. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the ac input voltage just measured matches the machine input voltage information on this label. Does the voltage measured match the voltage on the 2105 information label? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, inform the customer if the voltage is outside this range. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. __ 7. Switch OFF each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. __ 8. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. __ 9. Connect the mainline power cables: Note: Determine if the customer will be providing an UPS (uninterruptable power system) and how many UPS connections (one or two) will be available for this frame: v If only one UPS connection is available for this frame, verify the UPS is connected to mainline power cable 1. The 390 V batteries are only charged by the primary power supply attached to mainline power cable 1. v If two UPS connections are available for this frame, connect each UPS to a mainline power cable (1 or 2). v Connect each plug in mainline power cable to each customer ac power outlet. __ 10. Go to 10 on page 298.
286
Check 2105 Expansion Enclosure Mainline Power Cable Ground Continuity (Wired)
Attention: Use an IBM-approved analog multimeter. Do not use a digital meter. Attention: The 2105 Expansion Enclosure features two mainline power cables. Complete all steps of this section for both power sources and receptacles and for both power plugs, mainline power cables, and primary power supplies (PPS). __ 1. Switch off each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. __ 2. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. __ 3. Verify the system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 1 [Figure 252] on the rear of both primary power supplies is set to Off (down).
J1 J2 J3 J4 CB00
J5A
J5B J6
__ 4. Go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Connect each mainline power cable to its input connector on the line cord bracket connector: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 2 [Figure 253] v PPS 2, 3 [Figure 253]
287
PPS-1
PPS-2
Front View
__ 5. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less resistance. For connection information, refer to Figure 254 on page 289. Place one lead of the multimeter on the green and yellow wire the customer end of each mainline power cable. Place the other lead on the conductive metal of each primary power supply enclosure. v Good: If there is 1.0 ohm or less resistance, continue with the next step. v Bad: If there is more than 1.0 ohm resistance, go to MAP 2031: Repairing Ground Continuity in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
288
2105
Meter
Ohm
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
Figure 254. Ground Continuity Check with Wired Mainline, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009405)
__ 6. Disconnect each wired mainline power cable 4 [Figure 255] from the line cord bracket.
289
Front View
__ 7. Instruct the customer to call a licensed electrician to connect each wired mainline power cable to the customer mainline power source. Attention: For EMEA installations, review the information in EMEA Electrician Information on page 290, then return here and continue. __ 8. Continue with Check Customer Ground Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Wired).
290
2105
Meter
Vac
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
291
Ground
__ 2. Voltage is present at a customer outlet with both outlet circuit breakers off. DANGER Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. (1003) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Inform the customer that voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the ground pin of the failing wired ac mainline power cable. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance. For connection information, see Figure 258 on page 293. Measure the resistance between the female connector ground pin and the building ground. A reading of 1.0 ohm or less shows a safe, continuous grounding conductor. v Good: If the measured resistance at the ground pin is 1.0 ohm or less, continue with Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 293. v Bad: If the measured resistance is more than 1.0 ohm on the connector, inform the customer. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.
292
2105
Meter
Ohm
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
Ground
293
v Good: If all measured voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) at the voltage pins on the female connector or at the customers ac power outlet (female) are less than 1.0 V ac, continue with Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB On (Wired) on page 295. v Bad: If any measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing wired ac mainline power cable voltage pins or the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.
2105
A B
Customer AC Power
CB OFF
294
C Vac
295
2105
Meter
Vac
A
Good: Correct Input Voltage Fail: Incorrect Input Voltage
Customer AC Power
CB ON
C Vac
__ 4. Record the voltages measured, record the voltages in Table 46 on page 297.
296
__ 5. Continue with the next step. __ 6. Verify ac input voltages from Table 46 are correct. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the ac input voltage just measured matches the machine input voltage information on this label. Does the voltage measured match the voltage on the 2105 information label? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, inform the customer if the voltage is outside this range. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. __ 7. Switch OFF each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. __ 8. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers manual. __ 9. Connect the mainline power cables: Note: Determine if the customer will be providing an UPS (uninterruptable power system) and how many UPS connections (one or two) will be available for this frame: v If only one UPS connection is available for this frame, verify the UPS is connected to mainline power cable 1. The 390 V batteries are only charged by the primary power supply attached to mainline power cable 1. v If two UPS connections are available for this frame, connect each UPS to a mainline power cable (1 or 2). v Connect each wired mainline power cable to each connector on the line cord bracket. Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 1 [Figure 264] v PPS 2, 2 [Figure 264]
297
PPS-1
PPS-2
Front View
__ 10. Reinstall the frame tailgate bar (center) removed earlier, see 5 [Figure 174]. __ 11. Continue with Checking the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Switch Settings.
Note: To access the UEPO Local/Remote switch, you will need to loosen the single screw on the left side of the operator panel and swing the operator panel out. Pull the Local/Remote switch out before changing its position.
298
REMOTE
Front View
Front View
Rear View
__ 2. Go to the rear of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Verify that the power switches on all of the installed storage cage power supplies 1 and 2 , are set to On.
2105 Expansion Enclosure Storage Cage Power Supply
Rear View
Figure 266. Storage Cage Power Supply Switches (s009535)
__ 3. Verify that the five circuit breakers (CB01 to CB05) on each primary power supply 3 are set to On (up). __ 4. The main circuit breakers 4 on each primary power supply should be set to Off (down).
299
Rear View
__ 5. Each of the two power control cables must be connected to the correct RPC card in the 2105 Model 800, per Figure 268 on page 301. Each cable has two parts, the black cable connects to the PPS in the Expansion Enclosure. The white extension cable connects to the RPC card in the Model 800: v Find the white extension cable that is connected to the black cable labeled: RPC-1 / P3. Connect the white extension cable to 2105 Model 800 RPC-1 card connector J2 position 5 6 . v Find the white extension cable that is connected to the black cable labeled: RPC-2 / P3. Connect the white extension cable to 2105 Model 800 RPC-2 card connector J2 position 5 8 . a. Locate the rolled up control cables connected to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure primary power supply (PPS) J4 connectors 9 (PPS-1) and 12 (PPS-2). b. Unroll the cables. Note: Each cable assembly consists of a power cable, connected to the Expansion Enclosures PPS, and an interposer cable (P/N 18P4495) that allows the power cable to connect to the 2105 Model 800 RPC card. c. Feed the unused connector end of the cables through the rear side of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure, the rack spacer, and into the 2105 Model 800. Note: Do not attempt to route these cable through the 2105 tailgates. d. Connect the cables to the RPC cards as detailed above. Any extra cable length can be coiled in the spacer between the frames.
300
16 5
1
~
~
15
53
RPC-2 Card
J2
15
7 5
~
~
P/N 18P4495 15
Rear View
1 J2-5
(PPS-2, J4)
12
PPS-2 11
9 (PPS-1, J4)
PPS-1 10
Rear View
301
Front View
Rear View
302
4. Did the 2105 Model 800 being installed come with Feature Code 0970 (DDM bays removed for weight reduction)? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 6. 5. Locate each pair of adjacent 2105 Model 800 DDM bays that do not have short SSA cables installed to connectors JD or J8. Find and connect the short SSA cables as shown in Figure 271. Adjacent DDM bay pairs are: (Reference Figure 269 on page 302.) v R1-U1-W1 and R1-U1-W2 v R1-U1-W3 and R1-U1-W4 v R1-U1-W5 and R1-U1-W6 v R1-U1-W7 and R1-U1-W8 v R1-U2-W1 and R1-U2-W2 v R1-U2-W3 and R1-U2-W4 v R1-U2-W5 and R1-U2-W6 v R1-U2-W7 and R1-U2-W8
JD DDM Bay J8
J8 Front View JD
Figure 271. DDM Bay Short Cable SSA Connector Locations (s009608)
6. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. 7. Instruct the customer to switch on each circuit breaker that supplies the mainline ac power to each customer ac power outlet or wired mainline power cable.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
303
13
Rear View
Figure 272. Primary Power Supply (S009108)
9. Verify that all the 390 V battery cables are connected at battery 1 (three cables) 15 and battery 2 (one cable) 14 : v Battery 1, J1A to PPS 1, J5A v Battery 1, J1B to PPS 1, J5B v Battery 2, J1 to Battery 1, J2 Notes: a. If battery cables are disconnected set the MASTER circuit breaker (S2) on 390 V battery 1 16 to Off (down) before connecting any 390 V battery cable. b. On newer batteries, S2 is labeled CB06. 10. Set the MASTER circuit breaker (S2) on 390 V battery 1 16 to On (up). Note: This circuit breaker is normally set to off by manufacturing.
2105 Expansion Enclosure
Battery 2
Battery 1
Rear View
14
15
16
Figure 273. 2105 Expansion Enclosure 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (S008667m)
11. Are you using MES instructions to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure? v Yes, continue with How to Power on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and Test the Installation on page 305. v No, continue with the next step.
304
How to Power on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and Test the Installation
This section describes the actions that should be done to power on and test the 2105 Expansion Enclosure using an MES. v Powering on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure v Attachment and activation of the service terminal. v Installation using the service terminal.
Step
__ 2.
__ 3.
__ 4.
__ 5. __ 6.
__ 7.
__ 8.
LEDs ON (green)
305
Step
__ 9.
__ 10. Observe each primary power supplies digital status display (EE also). __ 13. Continue with Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Using the Service Terminal on page 309.
__ 2. On the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel, set the Unit Emergency switch 2 to Off (down). __ 3. On the 2105 Model 800 operator panel, set the Local Power switch 1 to On (up) momentarily, then release it. Note: This testing is to verify that the 2105 Expansion Enclosure will not power on with the UEPO switch set to Off (down).
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency 2105 Expansion Enclosure
2
Unit Emergency
1
Local Power
Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2
__ 4. Go to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel. Observe the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 and perform the action described in Table 49 on page 307. Attention: If the 2105 powers on, the Unit Emergency switch is not working. You must repair the problem before continuing, see MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
306
Action Normal, go to step 5 Go to MAP 2380: 2105 Expansion Enclosure UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. Go to MAP 2380: 2105 Expansion Enclosure UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2380: 2105 Expansion Enclosure UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2380: 2105 Expansion Enclosure UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
On
Off
Off
On
__ 5. On the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel, set the Unit Emergency switch 2 , in Figure 274 on page 306, to On (up). __ 6. On the 2105 Model 800 operator panel, set the Local Power switch 1 , in Figure 274 on page 306, to On (up), then release it. You may have to wait up to four minutes for the final state of the Power Complete, Line Cord indicators (indicators stop blinking and remain on). Note: This power sequence testing does not require waiting for IML to complete. __ 7. Observe the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 and perform the action described in Table 50.
Table 50. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators Power Complete, Line Cord 1 On On Power Complete, Line Cord 2 On Off
Action Normal, go to step 9 on page 308. Go to MAP 2420: 2105 Expansion Enclosure Local Power On Problems in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2420: 2105 Expansion Enclosure Local Power On Problems in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2420: 2105 Expansion Enclosure Local Power On Problems in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
Off
On
Off or blinking
Off or blinking
__ 8. Observe the CHK/PWR-GOOD (check/power) indicator 1 and 2 [Figure 266], on the installed storage cage power supplies. Perform the action described in Table 51 on page 308.
307
__ 9. Go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Verify that the PWR Good indicator, 3 in Figure 275, on the front of both primary power supplies 1 and 2 is on. Perform the action described in Table 52.
2105 Expansion Enclosure
PPS 1/2
.
J8 J9
3
Figure 275. Primary Power Supply (S008668n) Table 52. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Primary Power Supply PPS Good Indicators Power Supply PWR Good Indicators Both on 1 on, 1 off Both off
Action Normal, go to step 10 Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.
__ 10. Verify that the digital display, 4 in Figure 275, on the front of primary power supplies 1 and 2 is blank. You may have to wait up to four minutes for the final state of the Power Complete, Line Cord indicators (indicators stop blinking and remain on). v If both digital displays are blank, continue with Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Using the Service Terminal on page 309.
308
309
310
311
Front View
Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R2-U2-W5 R2-U2-W6 R2-U2-W7 R2-U2-W8 Storage Cage 4 (-U4-) R2-U4-W5 R2-U4-W6 R2-U4-W7 R2-U4-W8 12345678
Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R2-U1-W5 R2-U1-W6 R2-U1-W7 R2-U1-W8 Storage Cage 3 (-U3-) R2-U3-W5 R2-U3-W6 R2-U3-W7 R2-U3-W8
Rear View
Figure 277. Location Codes for DDM bays in a 2105 Expansion Enclosure (S007741s)
Certify DDMs
__ 1. Check that all DDM drawers are formatted. Connect the service terminal to the working cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu DDM Bay (Drawer) Menu
312
__ 2.
__ 3.
__ 4. __ 5.
d. Login as service. __ 6. Run DDM Certify to verify that all DDMs are free from defects. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu SSA Devices Certify Menu Select All Drawers/DDMs Listed Below to start Certify on all DDMs. Certify will normally take between 35 minutes and 2 hours, depending on the machine configuration (number of DDM bays, DDM capacity, and DDM speed).
313
Logical Configurations
__ 1. Wait for the certify DDMs process to complete, then continue with the next step. __ 2. Is the customer going to do the logical configuration of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure? v Yes, go to step Completing the Installation. v No, continue with the next step. __ 3. Use the customer provided configuration planner worksheets (appendix A and or appendix D) to do the following: v To configure open systems volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist. v To configure S/390 custom volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist. When logical configuration is complete, go to Completing the Installation.
Front View
Figure 278. Storing the Service Terminal Table (S009161)
__ 3. Install the front or rear spacer service panels, see step 7 on page 269. To install the service panels, do the step in the reverse order. __ 4. Place the following items in the front and rear document enclosures for future reference and use:
314
315
Cluster 1 (R1-T1)
Cluster 2 (R1-T2-)
Cluster 1 Tailgate
Front View
Cluster 2 Tailgate
__ 2. Do the following steps only on the tailgate or tailgates with the cables you are installing or removing. __ 3. Determine which cables you will be installing or removing: v SCSI cables v Cluster communication: Ethernet, LAN, or Modem cables v Fibre channel or ESCON cables Are you installing or removing ONLY Fibre channel or ESCON cables? v Yes, go to Cluster Fibre Channel and ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps on page 322. v No, go to Tailgate Hardware Removal and Installation.
316
Cluster 1
Cluster 2
1
Cluster 1
SCSI Tailgates
2
Cluster 2
Front View
__ 2. Remove the two rear end plate screws: v Cluster 1 v Cluster 2 __ 3. Remove the v Cluster 1 __ 4. __ 5. __ 6. 5 6 front screw from the end plate: 8
__ 7.
v Cluster 2 11 Remove the free end plate from the tailgate. Pull the rubber cable grommet out of the plate that is still fastened to the tailgate. Remove the two end tailgate plate bracket mounting screws: v Cluster 1 7 and 9 v Cluster 2 10 and 12 Remove the tailgate bar and the attached tailgate plates from the tailgate. Continue with Cluster SCSI and Communication Cable Tailgate Clamps on page 318.
317
5
Cluster 1 Cluster 2
Top View
7
Front View
Figure 281. Tailgate Bar Removal (S009156)
10
11
12
318
10
__ 4. Install or remove the SCSI or cluster communication cables. If installing cables, feed enough of the cable through the strain relief gate so the cable reaches the cluster and can be retained. Note: Position the SCSI cables in the tailgate so the cables exposed metal braid will be clamped by the grounding area of the clamp.
Host Bay
319
__ __ __ __
5. 6. 7. 8.
__ 9. __ 10. __ 11.
320
Front View
ESD Pad
I/O Drawer 1
I/O Drawer 2
Front View
321
Fibre and ESCON Cables Cluster, Ethernet, LAN, ESS Net, and Modem Cables SCSI Interface Cables Bay 1, cards 1 and 2 Bay 1, cards 3 and 4 Bay 2, cards 1 and 2 Bay 2, cards 3 and 4
Figure 286. Cluster 1, Tailgate Cable and Cable Clamp Locations (S008270m)
Cluster 2 Tailgate
Cluster, Ethernet, LAN, ESS Net, and Modem Cables SCSI Interface Cables Bay 3, cards 1 and 2 Bay 3, cards 3 and 4 Bay 4, cards 1 and 2 Bay 4, cards 3 and 4 Fibre and ESCON Cables
322
Front View
If there is not enough room for the fibre channel or ESCON connector to pass through the grommet, do the following steps: a. Remove both screws from the end plate: See Figure 289 on page 324. v Cluster 1 3 and 5 v Cluster 2 4 and 6 Remove the free end plate from the tailgate. Pull the rubber cable grommet out of the plate that is still fastened to the tailgate. Open the split in the rubber grommet and add or remove the fibre channel or ESCON cable. Reinstall the grommet and end plate into the tailgate. Continue with the next step.
b. c. d. e. f.
323
3
Cluster 1 Cluster 2
Top View
5
Front View
Figure 289. Tailgate Bar Removal (S009157)
__ 3. Determine if you have an ESCON only gate or ESCON/fibre bracket for cable strain relief. See Figure 290 on page 325. v If ESCON only strain relief gate, continue with the next step. v If ESCON/fibre strain relief bracket, go to 12 on page 327. Note: Both brackets can retain ESCON cables, if you have any fibre channel cables you must have the fibre/ESCON strain relief bracket.
324
Cluster 1
ESCON only
ESCON / fibre
FRONT (LEFT)
Cluster 2
ESCON / fibre
ESCON only
FRONT
(RIGHT)
__ 4. Refer to Figure 291 on page 326 for the following steps. Remove the screw 7 that holds the ESCON strain relief gate closed. __ 5. Open the strain relief gate and remove the strain relief plate 9 . If removing an ESCON cable, remove it from the strain relief plate. __ 6. Feed the ESCON cable through the grommet 10 in the bottom of the strain relief gate.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
325
10
__ 9. Reinstall any ESCON cable strain relief as required. Note: Allow enough extra cable length so the host bays can be moved to their service position with all cables connected. v If installing an ESCON cable, install the new cable into the strain relief plate. Then reinstall the cable strain relief plate into the gate.
326
327
11 12
13 14
15
16
Figure 293. Fibre/ESCON Cable Strain Relief Bracket Hardware (S009013M)
328
329
330
R1U1W4 R1U1W3 R2U1W4 R2U1W3 R2U3W4 R2U3W3 R1U2W4 R1U2W3 R2U2W4 R2U2W3 R2U4W4 R2U4W3 R1U1W2 R1U1W1 R2U1W2 R2U1W1 R2U3W2 R2U3W1 R1U2W2 R1U2W1 R2U2W2 R2U2W1 R2U4W2 R2U4W1 R1U1W8 R1U1W7 R2U1W8 R2U1W7 R2U3W8 R2U3W7 R1U2W8 R1U2W7 R2U2W8 R2U2W7 R2U4W8 R2U4W7 R1U1W6 R1U1W5 R2U1W6 R2U1W5 R2U3W6 R2U3W5 R1U2W6 R1U2W5 R2U2W6 R2U2W5 R2U4W6 R2U4W5
Notes: a. This table shows the standard configuration for DDM bays. If the customer chooses a different configuration, contact your next level of support to understand the unusual configuration. b. There may be times when DDM bay pairs with different capacities and speeds are available for installation. When installing more than one pair of DDM bays on an SSA loop, installation of the higher capacity and speed DDM bays first is recommended.
331
Note: For AAL configured machines, drawers are added in increments of four; two on each loop of an SSA adapter pair. For example, if two drawers are added to the Green loop then two drawers will be added to the Red loop. If the drawers are being added concurrently, the service login process will guide adding the drawers one at a time. __ 2. Locate the physical location where the DDM bay is to be installed. Unlatch the air door 33 and push it in and look into the opening. a. Check that the power cable docking connector is installed in the rear crossbar 34 . b. Check that the other end of the cable is plugged into the correct storage cage power planar 35 connector. See Figure 297 on page 333 and Figure 298 on page 334.
DDM Bay
33
34
Figure 296. DDM Bay Air Door and Power Cable (S007697L)
35
332
Storage Cage U2
F1 F3
F2
Storage Cage U3
F1 F3
Power Planar Q2
F1 J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J12 J11 J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21
Storage Cage U4
F1 F3
F2
Front View
Figure 297. DDM Bay Front Power Cable Locations (s009349)
333
Storage Cage U1
F6 F4
Storage Cage U4
F6 F4
Power Planar Q2
J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21 J18 J17 J16 J15 J124 J13 J12 J11
Storage Cage U3
F6 F4
Rear View
Figure 298. DDM Bay Rear Power Cable Locations (s009350)
__ 3. Pull the air door down until it latches closed. __ 4. Continue with Installing the DDM Bay.
334
1
Figure 299. DDM Bay Locations (s009555)
2
(4 Screws)
3
Front View
Figure 300. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556)
__ 7. Remove and reseat the host bypass card 4 and controller card 5 . Note: This will help resolve any problems associated with the cards becoming unseated during shipment.
4 5
335
__ 2. Are you installing multiple DDM bays on a loop at the same time? Note: Installing DDM bays at the same time will take much less time than installing them one at a time. Installing multiple DDM bays on a loop with an existing DDM bay, requires that you take the existing DDM bay from the customer during the installation. v Yes, go to step 3. v No, go to Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal. __ 3. Is this the last DDM bay being installed on this loop? v Yes, go to Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal. v No, to install the next DDM bay, return to Preparing a DDM Bay for Installation on page 330.
336
337
LOOP COLORS
Tx-U0.1-P1-I1-A Tx-U0.1-P1-I1-B
Tx-U0.1-P1-I12-A Tx-U0.1-P1-I12-B
Tx-U0.1-P1-I2-A Tx-U0.1-P1-I2-B
338
LOOP COLORS
Front View
I/O DRAWER 1 (R1-T1) I/O DRAWER 2 (R1-T2) Tx-u0.1-P1-I1 Tx-u0.1-P1-I2 SSA Device Cards Tx-u0.1-P1-I11 Tx-u0.1-P1-I12
339
__ 2. A label is attached only to each SSA cable that connects to an SSA Card in each cluster. The label lists the cluster I/O drawer planar assembly slot the SSA card is plugged into. It also lists the SSA card connector the cable is plugged into. Notes: a. To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group.
340
When the service terminal configuration process is complete, and any related problems have been repaired, ensure the indicators are as listed above. If any indicator is not correct, replace the FRU that contains the indicator. See Replacing a FRU Using the Service Terminal on page 6 and Chapter 4: FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures on page 1. When all the Power indicators and Ready indicators are on, and all the Check indicators are off, continue with the next step.
341
342
343
Front View
Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) Storage Cage 1 (-U1-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Rear View
Figure 308. R1- Location Codes for DDM Bays in a 2105 Model 800 (s009134)
__ 2. Install DDM bays in the order shown on the DDM Bay Location Chart: (Reference Figure 309 on page 345 and Figure 310 on page 345.) a. Press the storage cage air door 1 in until it is free of the latch. b. Temporarily move the adjacent SSA cables out of the way to prevent damage. c. Slide the DDM bay frame fully into the storage cage slot. Verify that the DDM bay serial number plate is on the lower right corner 3 .
344
1
Figure 309. DDM Bay Storage Cage Air Door (s009555)
2
(4 Screws)
3
Front View
Figure 310. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556)
__ 3. Using the information on the SSA device cable connector labels, connect the SSA cables to each DDM bay (refer to Figure 311 for the DDM bay connector locations).
__ 4. Are you installing this 2105 Model 800 with a 2105 Expansion Enclosure? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 6 on page 346. __ 5. Are you using an MES to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure?
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
345
JD DDM Bay J8
J8 Front View JD
Figure 312. DDM Bay Short Cable SSA Connector Locations (S007703l)
346
347
Front View
Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R2-U2-W5 R2-U2-W6 R2-U2-W7 R2-U2-W8 Storage Cage 4 (-U4-) R2-U4-W5 R2-U4-W6 R2-U4-W7 R2-U4-W8 12345678
Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R2-U1-W5 R2-U1-W6 R2-U1-W7 R2-U1-W8 Storage Cage 3 (-U3-) R2-U3-W5 R2-U3-W6 R2-U3-W7 R2-U3-W8
Rear View
Figure 313. R2- Location Codes for DDM Bays in a 2105 Expansion Enclosure (s007741s)
__ 2. Install DDM bays in the order shown on the DDM Bay Location Chart: (Reference Figure 314 on page 349 and Figure 315 on page 349.) a. Press the storage cage air door 1 in until it is free of the latch. b. Temporarily move the adjacent SSA cables out of the way to prevent damage. c. Slide the DDM bay frame fully into the storage cage slot. Verify that the DDM bay serial number plate is on the lower right corner 3 .
348
1
Figure 314. DDM Bay Storage Cage Air Door (s009555)
2
(4 Screws)
3
Front View
Figure 315. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556)
__ 3. Using the information on the SSA device cable connector labels, connect the SSA cables to each DDM bay (refer to Figure 316 for the DDM bay connector locations).
349
350
(R1-)
Host Bays
Front View
__ 6. Install the host cards in the card slot indicated by the service terminal: v Host card 1, (R1-Bx-H1) v Host card 2, (R1-Bx-H2) v Host card 3, (R1-Bx-H3) v Host card 4, (R1-Bx-H4)
351
Host Bays
R1-B1
R1-B2
R1-B3
R1-B4
Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4
ZA ZB
ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01
Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A
Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) a. Do the following steps only on the host cards and the host bay slots the cards are being installed into. Note: Repeat the following steps for multiple cards. b. Remove the two block plate mounting screws 1 then remove the block plate 2 .
352
2 3
d. Install the host cards 6 with its connector bracket 5 against the inside of the front of the host bay. e. Install and tighten the two host card connector bracket screws 4 , f. Install the host card, rear locking pin 7 .
7
Front View Front View
__ 7. Replace parts in the reverse order, see Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109. Note: Fibre host cards have a combination dust cover and wrap tool installed on each port. Leave the wrap tool installed until connecting the host cables. __ 8. After the part replacement is complete, return to the service terminal to continue the install process. This will test the complete host bay and its cards. Is this a nonconcurrent install? v Yes, A nonconcurrent host card install will require a machine IML. After the IML is complete, continue with the next step.
353
__ 9.
354
355
356
357
Host Bays
R1-B1
R1-B2
R1-B3
R1-B4
Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4
ZA ZB
ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01
Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A
Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) __ 15. Verify that each host cable passes through the 2105 Model 800 tailgate below it, and is held by the tailgate cable clamps. Verify that the tailgate hardware is installed correctly. See 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316. __ 16. Inform the customer that the 2105 host connections are ready for use.
358
359
(R1-)
Host Bays
Front View
__ 3. Remove the host card from the card slot indicated by the service terminal: v Host card 1, (R1-Bx-H1) v Host card 2, (R1-Bx-H2) v Host card 3, (R1-Bx-H3) v Host card 4, (R1-Bx-H4)
360
Host Bays
R1-B1
R1-B2
R1-B3
R1-B4
Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4
ZA ZB
ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01
Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A
Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) a. Do the following steps only on the host card and the host bay slot the card is being removed from. b. Remove the two card connector plate mounting screws 1
361
3
Front View
Figure 324. Host Card Removal Locations (s009558)
Front View
c. Remove the host card, rear locking pin 3 . d. Remove the host card 2 from the bay by pulling straight up. e. Install the block plate 5 , install and tighten the two block plate screws 4 . f. Install the host card, rear locking pin 6 .
5 6
__ 4. Replace parts in the reverse order, see Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109. __ 5. After the part replacement is complete, return to the service terminal to continue the removal process. This will test the complete host bay and its cards. When the verification testing is complete at the service terminal, return to the procedure that sent you here (such as a repair or MES).
362
363
364
Front View
__ 2. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu Show/Repair Problems Needing Repair Menu Select and repair all open problems. __ 3. Disconnect the service terminal from the 2105 Model 800 and push the service terminal table in. Continue with Powering Off the 2105 Subsystem.
365
Local Power
Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2
Figure 327. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Switch Locations (s009421)
__ 2. At the rear of each 2105 in the subsystem, set the 390 V battery 1 MASTER circuit breaker (CB, S2) 1 to Off (down). Note: 2105 Model 800 shown.
Battery 2
Battery 1
Rear View
Figure 328. 350 Volt Battery Locations (s009159)
__ 3. Open the rear cover of each 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack in the subsystem and locate the primary power supplies (PPS): v 2105 Model 800: Primary power supply-1, right 3 Primary power supply-2, left 2 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Primary power supply-1, right 5 Primary power supply-2, left 4
366
2
PPS-2
3
PPS-1
4
PPS-2
5
PPS-1
Rear View
Figure 329. Primary Power Supply Locations (s009579)
Rear View
__ 4. Switch the PPS system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 6 to Off (down) on all primary power supplies in the subsystem.
CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 J1 J2 J3 J4 J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5
J5A J5B J6
CB00
Rear View
Figure 330. Primary Power Supply System Power CB Location (S008689l)
__ 5. Instruct the customer to switch off the circuit breaker that supplies mainline ac voltage to both mainline power cables for each 2105 rack you are moving in the subsystem. Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each of these tripped customer ac mainline voltage circuit breakers. Refer to Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. Note: Each 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack in the subsystem has two mainline power cables that connect to the primary power supplies in each rack. __ 6. Determine where the two mainline power cables from each 2105 you are moving connect to the customers power. Note if the customer end of the mainline power cable is connected to customer power by a pluggable connector or wires and terminals. Disconnect these mainline power cables from the customers AC power: v For plug in mainline power cables, you can disconnect the connector.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
367
I/O Drawer 1
I/O Drawer 2
Front View
2. Continue with Disconnect Mainline Power Cables from Rack Being Moved.
368
Front View
(2 Screws)
__ 2. Remove the two center tailgate bar mounting screws 3 and remove the bar. __ 3. Release the top and bottom line cord latches, then disconnect the mainline power cables 1 and 2 from the line cord brackets __ 4. Remove the mainline power cables from the 2105. With some installations, you may have to remove the tailgate bar for additional clearance. __ 5. Continue with Disconnect Control and Interface Cables.
369
2 1
3
FRONT
FRONT
__ 3. Locate and disconnect the two primary power supply to RPC card control cables. These cables are between the 2105 Expansion Enclosure primary power supplies 1 8 and 2 7 and the 2105 Model 800 rack power control-1 6 and -2 cards 5 . See Figure 334 on page 371. Note: The primary power supply to RPC card control cables run through the openings in the sides of the attached 2105s. a. Disconnect the control cables connected to the 2105 Model 800 RPC cards at 5 and 6 . Note: Each control cable assembly consists of a power cable, connected to the 2105 Expansion Enclosures PPS, and an interposer cable (P/N 18P4495) that allows the power cable to connect to the2105 Model 800 RPC card. b. Verify that the disconnected cable connectors are labeled for reinstallation. c. Feed the disconnected end of the cables through the rear side of the rack spacer, and into the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. d. Coil up the excess cable and store it in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure.
370
5
16
1
~
~
5 P/N 18P4495
15
RPC-2 2
6
16
RPC-2 Card
J2
1
~
~
15
P/N 18P4495 15
Rear View
1 J2-5
(PPS-2, J4)
(PPS-1, J4)
PPS-2
PPS-1
Rear View
__ 4. Locate the frame ground strap 9 from the 2105 Expansion Enclosure to the 2105 Model 800. Remove the ground strap screw from the 2105 Model 800 end of the ground strap. Feed the ground strap through the frame spacer and attach it to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure frame.
371
Front View
__ 5. Locate all of the SSA device cables from the 2105 Expansion Enclosure to the 2105 Model 800 DDM bays. Disconnect all of these SSA cables from the 2105 Model 800 DDM bays they attach to. Notes: a. Ensure that all SSA device cable connectors are labeled for reinstallation before disconnecting them. b. To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group.
__ 6. Free the SSA device cables from the 2105 Model 800 and pull them through the rack spacer into the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Roll these cables up and strap or tape them, in any open area, near the opening in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure they feed through. __ 7. At the front of the 2105 Model 800, disconnect all of the SCSI, ESCON, or Fibre channel host cables from the host bay, see Figure 337 on page 373.
372
Host Bays
R1-B1
R1-B2
R1-B3
R1-B4
Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4
ZA ZB
ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01
Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A
Figure 337. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (s009142)
Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) __ 8. Disconnect all Ethernet 10 and modem 11 cables from the front of 1 and 2. Note: Ensure that all disconnected cable connectors are properly labeled for reinstallation.
373
Front View
10 Connectors 11 S2
S3
__ 9. If the remote power control feature in installed, disconnect the remote power control cables from the remote power control card. See Figure 156 on page 147. __ 10. Free all cables retained by the tailgate cable clamps, use 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316. Pull all of the free SCSI, ESCON, fibre channel, and communication cables out of the 2105 Model 800. __ 11. Continue with Disconnecting 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure Frames.
374
s008406m
FRONT
7 8 9
FRONT
__ 3. On the 2105 Model 800 rack being moved, reinstall all of the tailgate cable clamps and ESD plates. See 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316. __ 4. Continue with Moving the 2105 Model 800 Subsystem on page 376.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5
375
376
377
Cluster 1
Cluster 2
Front View
Figure 341. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Location (s009395)
378
Host Bays
R1-B1
R1-B2
R1-B3
R1-B4
Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4
ZA ZB
ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01
Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A
Figure 342. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (s009142)
Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) __ 6. Route and connect the SSA device cables stored in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure through to the DDM bay they connect to in the 2105 Model 800. Refer to the label on each SSA cable. See Figure 343 on page 380 and
379
Front View
Rear View
380
__ 7. Is the 2105 being reconnected to the same ESSNet with no communication configuration changes? v Yes, go to step 10. v No, continue with the next step. __ 8. Route the ethernet LAN cables to the RJ45 connector (10/100) on each cluster using the labels on the cables. Do NOT connect them at this time. __ 9. Check that the cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable 1 is connected between the I/O drawers. Continue with step 11 on page 382
I/O Drawer 1
I/O Drawer 2
Front View
__ 10. Connect the ethernet LAN cables to the RJ45 connector on each cluster using the labels on the cables.
381
Front View
__ 11. Connect the ESSNet hub and Master Console. Using Figure 347 on page 383, perform steps 2 on page 226 to 4 on page 226 and step 2 on page 228.
382
Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector ESSNET* Ethernet RJ45 cable Ethernet Hub 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X
Master Console
IBM
9X
10X
11X
12X 13X
14X
15X 16 MDI-X 16 MDI MDI PORT Customer Port (non-crossover) Customer Port (crossover)
Ethernet 10 Base T (RJ45) connector * Note: See table for recommended plugging of additional 2105 subsystem connections to the Ethernet Hub
8X
Crossover
16 Ethernet Switch
Figure 347. ESSNet Hub Port Connector Locations (S008603p)
__ 12. Install all the cable clamps and strain relief for all cables entering the 2105 Model 800, see 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316.
383
Battery 2
Battery 1
Rear View
Figure 348. 2105 Model 800 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (s009128)
__ 2. Switch the System Power CB 4 on the rear of each primary power supply to On (up).
Rear View
Figure 349. Primary Power Supply (s009616)
__ 3. Power on the 2105 subsystem, perform steps 2 on page 209 through 13 on page 214. __ 4. Continue with Testing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem.
384
I/O Drawer 1
I/O Drawer 2
Front View
v Yes, disconnect the cluster to cluster ethernet cable and connect the ethernet LAN cables to the RJ45 connector on each cluster using the labels on the cables. Continue with Testing Customer Ethernet LAN Cables and Master Console. v No, continue with Testing Customer Ethernet LAN Cables and Master Console.
385
Front View
__ 2. Ensure that all problems are repaired before continuing. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select:
386
387
388
389
390
Note: LIC Features must be identical between the Source and the Target ESS Subsystems. 3. Perform an End of Call Status to check for open problems and quiesced or fenced resources. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu End of Call Status Resolve all open problems. Note: All problems must be resolved before any attempt is made to capture the Source ESS configuration. 4. Record the physical location of all Fibre Channel and SCSI Host cards. Note: The physical locations of all Fibre Channel and SCSI Host cards must be identical between the Source and Target ESS Subsystems.
391
392
393
394
395
Configuration
Note: 2105 Model 750 information v The 2105 Model 750 is fully supported by the service information in this chapter when following guided procedures. However, the service information will only reference the 2105 Model 800. v The 2105 Model 750 supports limited configuration options when compared to the 2105 Model 800. For further information, reference the IBM TotalStorage ESS Introduction and Planning Guide (form number SC267246).
396
Configuration
Licensed Internal Code Maintenance Menu LIC Feature Menu Activate LIC Feature 1. Follow all of the screen instructions, they will guide you through the diskette insertion and removal steps. 2. When completed, all LIC features will be enabled per the file record on the diskette. Note: When the LIC features are displayed, a serial number will be listed on the right. This is a unique Serial Number for the LIC feature and it will be different from the 2105 serial number. In some cases this may appear as 00-00000 (no action is required).
397
Configuration
Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Modem Configuration Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Call Home / Remote Services Menu and select: When entering modem information, always select the Microcom DeskPorte modem (even if you are installing a Multitech MultiModem). 3. Configure the remaining Call Home / Remote Services: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communication Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Call Home / Remote Services Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheets.
Configure E-Mail
Note: The following actions must be performed on both clusters. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu E-Mail Menu Change / Show Error Notification Count Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select one of the following: - Smart-Host Relay Menu v Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select: v Change Local E-Mail Configuration v Enter information from the Communication Resources worksheet. Note: Local E-Mail and Smart-Host Relay can not be enabled at the same time. - Add E-Mail Destination v Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select: v Change / Show E-Mail Destination Settings v Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet.
398
Configuration
Configure SNMP
From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu SNMP Menu Change / Show SNMP Configuration Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet.
Logical Configurations
Notes: 1. If the customer chooses to perform their own logical configuration using the ESS Specialist, this procedure is not necessary. 2. When storage is being added to a previously configured SSA loop, the ESS Specialist must be used. The ESS Batch Configuration Tool (below) can only be used on previously unconfigured SSA loops. 3. The Batch Configuration Tool is no longer supported for LIC levels higher than VRMF 2.3.0.0 To apply the logical configuration, use one of the following alternate methods: v ESS Specialist or v Configuration Duplication Menu option or v Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from the ISA menu option Procedure: 1. Define the storage configuration. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu ESS Batch Configuration Tool Menu Define a Storage Configuration Note: Check if the SSA card that you want to configure is in the A List of All Unconfigured SSA Cards. If the SSA card is not listed, the drawers belonging to that SSA card must be configured using the ESS Specialist. Enter the information from the Configuration Worksheets to do the following: v To configure open systems volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist and the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for Open-System manual, form number SC26-7477
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6
399
Configuration
v To configure S/390 custom volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist and the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries manual, form number SC26-7476 (Appendix B). v To configure S/390 standard volumes, you can use either the ESS Specialist or the service terminal ESS Batch Configuration Tool and the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries manual, form number SC26-7476 (Appendix A). 2. Apply the defined storage configuration list. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu ESS Batch Configuration Tool Menu Apply Defined Storage Configuration List
Note: The application of the Defined Storage Configuration is a background process that may take several hours to complete. This installation procedure will later use the Display Status of Apply Process to verify completion status before giving the 2105 to the customer. 3. Perform ESS Specialist Configuration from Master Console If additional configuration needs to be completed, use the ESS Specialist from the Master Console. Note: The IBM TotalStorage ESS Master Console will be referred to as the Master Console in this document.
400
Configuration
v WEB Copy Services enablement for S/390 (WEB Copy Services commands for S/390 volumes) From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches Fibre Channel LUN Access Control Enter information from the Configuration Resources Worksheet. Note: Control switches cannot be set by the customer using the ESS Specialist. You, the field service representative, must set the control switches correctly for fibre channel operation. Allow CUIR to Automatically Vary Paths OFF/ON Enter the Enabled/Disabled information from the Configuration Worksheet. WEB Copy Services commands for S/390 volumes Enter the Enabled/Disabled information from the Configuration Resources Worksheet.
401
Configuration
3. Notify the customer that you must disable Copy Services because TCP/IP information changes are being made. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Copy Services Server Menu Disable ( Disable Copy Services ) Note: Review the Copy Services worksheet information to determine if TCP/IP changes affect the Copy Services Configuration. Any Copy Services changes will need to be made prior to restarting Copy Services. 4. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Minimum Configuration & Startup (Dual Cluster Version) Select en0. Note: If the customer wants to use et0 Ethernet interface, call your next level of support. 5. Is the ESSNet already attached to the customers network? v Yes, enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. Press Enter then continue with the next step. v No, enter the default TCP/IP configuration information from Table 55 on page 403. Press Enter then continue with the next step. Note: Defaults can only be used when the ESSNet is not attached to the customer network.
402
Configuration
Table 55. Default TCP/IP Settings 2105 Subsystem on ESSNet First First Second Second Third Third Fourth Fourth Fifth Fifth Sixth Sixth Seventh Seventh Cluster HOST NAME Internet Address 172.31.1.1 172.31.1.2 172.31.1.3 172.31.1.4 172.31.1.5 172.31.1.6 172.31.1.7 172.31.1.8 172.31.1.9 172.31.1.10 172.31.1.11 172.31.1.12 172.31.1.13 172.31.1.14 Network Mask
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
ess1c1 ess1c2 ess2c1 ess2c2 ess3c1 ess3c2 ess4c1 ess4c2 ess5c1 ess5c2 ess6c1 ess6c2 ess7c1 ess7c2
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
[essnet1] [essnet1]
[172.31.1.250] [172.31.1.250]
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Notes: a. Set the following additional TCP/IP Settings not covered in the table above as follows: v NAME SERVER Internet Address, blank*. v NAME SERVER Domain Name, blank*. v Default Gateway Address, blank*. b. A blank* indicates that this field should be blank. c. Spaces following Host Names can also cause problems. 6. You will be asked if you wish to Verify Cluster to Cluster communication. Move the cursor and press enter as directed. The verification tests will then run. Did the verifications tests run successfully? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to MAP 4410: Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Communication Test in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 to repair the problem. When the problem is resolved, return here and continue with the next step. 7. Press F3 until you receive the Restarting TCP/IP daemons message, wait for the Press enter to continue message then press Enter. 8. If applicable, refer to to Communications Resources Worksheet. Determine if there is a second DNS assigned. Is there a second DNS assigned? v Yes, do this step. v No, continue with the next step. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select:
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6
403
Configuration
Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Further Configuration Name Resolution Domain Name Server Add a Name Server Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheet. 9. A new ESS Specialist certificate must be created if this machine was previously installed at another location, or the NAMESERVER Domain Name, or the TCP/IP address was changed. Use the following procedure: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Create New Key Files/Certificate Follow the service terminal instructions. 10. Restart the ESS Specialist. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enable the ESS Specialist 11. Notify the customer to restart Copy Services. 12. Update the ESSNet1 or Master console to use the changed ESS TCP/IP information. v If you have a Master console continue with the next step. v If you have an ESSNet1 continue with step 24 on page 405. 13. At the Master Console Login window, log in using the userid of service and the default password of service (or the locally assigned password). 14. At the Master Console desktop, double click on the Console Launcher icon. Then type in the password of service and click the Connect button. 15. At the Views frame, click on the Groups icon. 16. At the Groups frame, double click on the ESS Networks icon. 17. At the ESS Networks frame, select (single click) the ESS Network 1 icon. 18. At the ESS Networks Tasks frame, double click on ESS Configurations. 19. At the pop-up warning screen, click the OK button. 20. At the ESS Configurations screen, press the Refresh button. The clusters with updated TCP/IP information will show as N/A. 21. Select the first N/A entry and click Edit. Update the new Cluster IPAddress for each cluster of the ESS subsystem which was changed. 22. Click the OK button. Note: If N/A is returned in one or more columns, this indicates that the Master Console cannot communicate with the ESS. Check the network settings for both the ESS and the Master Console.
404
Configuration
23. Click the OK button. The update is now completed. 24. Configuring the Network Information of the 2105s on the ESSNet1 Console: a. On the ESSNet console, double click the ESSNet Toolkit icon on the desktop. b. Select the Install/Configure tab. c. Click on the Subsystem tab. d. Select the HostName of the cluster of the 2105 that needs to be changed. (To do this click on the Device-Model of the row you wish to edit.) e. Click on Edit Subsystem and change the following as supplied by the customer on the Communications Resources Worksheet. v HostName v IP Address v Subnet Mask f. Click on Save. Note: The window may not close if data is missing or not correct. g. Click OK. h. Close the ESSNet Toolkit window. i. The update is now complete.
405
Configuration
Note: Review the Copy Services worksheet information to determine if TCP/IP changes affect the Copy Services Configuration. Any Copy Services changes will need to be made prior to restarting Copy Services. 4. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Minimum Configuration & Startup Select en0. Note: If the customer wants to use et0 Ethernet interface, call your next level of support. 5. Is the ESSNet already attached to the customers network? v Yes, enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. Continue with the next step. v No, enter the default TCP/IP configuration information from Table 56. Continue with the next step. Note: Defaults can only be used when the ESSNet is not attached to the customer network.
Table 56. Default TCP/IP Settings 2105 Subsystem on ESSNet First First Second Second Third Third Fourth Fourth Fifth Fifth Sixth Sixth Seventh Seventh Cluster HOST NAME Internet Address 172.31.1.1 172.31.1.2 172.31.1.3 172.31.1.4 172.31.1.5 172.31.1.6 172.31.1.7 172.31.1.8 172.31.1.9 172.31.1.10 172.31.1.11 172.31.1.12 172.31.1.13 172.31.1.14 Network Mask
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
ess1c1 ess1c2 ess2c1 ess2c2 ess3c1 ess3c2 ess4c1 ess4c2 ess5c1 ess5c2 ess6c1 ess6c2 ess7c1 ess7c2
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
[essnet1] [essnet1]
[172.31.1.250] [172.31.1.250]
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Notes: a. Set the following additional TCP/IP Settings not covered in the table above as follows:
406
Configuration
v NAME SERVER Internet Address, blank*. v NAME SERVER Domain Name, blank*. v Default Gateway Address, blank*. b. A blank* indicates that this field should be blank. c. Spaces following Host Names can also cause problems. 6. Press F3 to Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Configure Alternate Cluster IP Address and Hostname. Use the information from the Communications Resources Worksheet or Table 56 on page 406 as determined in step 5 on page 406 to enter the INTERNET ADDRESS (dotted decimal) and HOSTNAME of the Alternate cluster (the cluster the service terminal is NOT connected to) of the 2105. Attention: The same TCP/IP and Hostname information must be repeated and entered on both clusters to avoid cluster-to-cluster communication error/timeouts. This will be done later in step 9. 7. Press F3 until you receive the Restarting TCP/IP daemons message, wait for the Press enter to continue message then press Enter. 8. If applicable, refer to to Communications Resources Worksheet. Determine if there is a second DNS assigned. Is there a second DNS assigned? v Yes, do this step. v No, continue with the next step. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Further Configuration Name Resolution Domain Name Server Add a Name Server Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheet. Repeat steps 4 on page 406 through 8 on the alternate cluster. Verify Cluster-Cluster communication. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu External Connections Menu Cluster-Cluster Communication Test Did the verifications tests run successfully? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to MAP 4410: Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Communication Test in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 to repair the problem. When the problem is resolved, return here and continue with the next step. A new ESS Specialist certificate must be created if this machine was previously installed at another location, or the NAMESERVER Domain Name, or the TCP/IP address was changed. Use the following procedure: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6
9. 10.
11.
12.
407
Configuration
ESS Specialist Menu Create New Key Files/Certificate Follow the service terminal instructions. 13. Restart the ESS Specialist. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enable the ESS Specialist Notify the customer to restart Copy Services. Update the ESSNet1 or Master console to use the changed ESS TCP/IP information. v If you have a Master console continue with the next step. v If you have an ESSNet1 continue with step 27. At the Master Console Login window, log in using the userid of service and the default password of service (or the locally assigned password). At the Master Console desktop, double click on the Console Launcher icon. Then type in the password of service and click the Connect button.
14. 15.
At the Views frame, click on the Groups icon. At the Groups frame, double click on the ESS Networks icon. At the ESS Networks frame, select (single click) the ESS Network 1 icon. At the ESS Networks Tasks frame, double click on ESS Configurations. At the pop-up warning screen, click the OK button. At the ESS Configurations screen, press the Refresh button. The clusters with updated TCP/IP information will show as N/A. 24. Select the first N/A entry and click Edit. Update the new Cluster IPAddress for each cluster of the ESS subsystem which was changed. 25. Click the OK button. Note: If N/A is returned in one or more columns, this indicates that the Master Console cannot communicate with the ESS. Check the network settings for both the ESS and the Master Console. 26. Click the OK button. The update is now completed. 27. Configuring the Network Information of the 2105s on the ESSNet1 Console: a. On the ESSNet console, double click the ESSNet Toolkit icon on the desktop. b. Select the Install/Configure tab. c. Click on the Subsystem tab. d. Select the HostName of the cluster of the 2105 that needs to be changed. (To do this click on the Device-Model of the row you wish to edit.) e. Click on Edit Subsystem and change the following as supplied by the customer on the Communications Resources Worksheet. v HostName v IP Address v Subnet Mask f. Click on Save. Note: The window may not close if data is missing or not correct.
408
Configuration
g. Click OK. h. Close the ESSNet Toolkit window. i. The update is now complete.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
13.
14.
Note: This will update the information on both clusters. 15. Press F3 repeatedly until you are given the option to logoff. Enter y. 16. Close the login screen by pressing the following keys: a. Press and release the Ctrl and A keys. b. Press and release the X key. c. Enter Yes to leave the minicom session. 17. Repeat steps 11 through 16 to update the master console TCP/IP information for each attached ESS. 18. Close the ESS Terminal Selector window.
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6
409
Configuration
19. Continue with Figure 189 on page 193.
Procedure
1. ALL of the 2105 subsystems using the ESS Specialist Copy Services, must be connected to the customer network. If the 2105s are not connected to the customer network, follow the steps in Connecting an ESSNet1 or Master Console to a Customer Network on page 243. When complete, return here to configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services. 2. Verify that DNS is configured.
410
Configuration
From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communication Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Minimum Configuration and Startup (Dual Cluster Version) Select en0. Note: Verify that under the NAMESERVER, the internet ADDRESS and DOMAIN Name are specified. If not, enter the information from the Communications Resources Worksheets. If the NAMESERVER internet ADDRESS or DOMAIN Name are changed, this information change must be repeated on the other cluster. You will be asked if you want to switch cluster connections at the end of this procedure. 3. Enable ESS Specialist Copy Services for S/390 for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches WEB Copy Service Commands for S/390 Volumes Note: Early levels of this service terminal screen may show System 390 Command Switch for smitty. Enter this information from the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet. The default is set to Disable. 4. Read the notes below before proceeding. Configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Copy Services Server Menu Change Server Definitions Enter the Primary Server and Backup Server IP Address then enter the requested client Cluster x Hostname and IP Address information. This information is from the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet. Notes: a. If the ESS is running at Code level 2.2.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Server and Client Configuration can be entered by the customer using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. b. If the ESS is running at Code level 3.3.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Client Configuration can only be entered using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. 5. Are you configuring copy services on the Primary Server?
411
Configuration
v Yes, to complete the configuration of copy services on the entire Server Group, this procedure must also be performed on the ESS subsystem containing the backup server (unless the backup server is on the same ESS subsystem). Instruct the customer to verify that the Backup Server site has: a. Copies of the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet for this ESS group b. Microcode at EC F25683 or higher installed c. A new ESS subsystem needs to be installed or an MES is required to install Copy Services on a currently installed machine d. Continue with the next step. v No, continue with the next step. 6. Verify that Copy Services is running and that the configuration is correct. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Utility Menu Show Web Status v On the Primary web server, the status should read: Copy Services Status: Copy Services is running The Local cluster is the Primary Copy Services Server v On the Backup web server, the status should read: Copy Services Status: Copy Services is running The Local cluster is the Backup Copy Services Server v If the Web Status doesnt show that copy services is running, ask the customer to restart the Copy Services server.
412
Configuration
Procedure
1. ALL of the 2105 subsystems using ESS Specialist Copy Services within the SAME Copy Services Group MUST be connected to the SAME network. If the 2105s need to be connected to the customer network (for ESS Specialist, ESS Expert or CLI), then follow the steps in Connecting an ESSNet1 or Master Console to a Customer Network on page 243. When complete return here to configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services. 2. Enable ESS Specialist Copy Services for S/390 for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches WEB Copy Service Commands for S/390 Volumes Note: Early levels of this service terminal screen may show System 390 Command Switch for smitty. Enter the information from the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. The default is set to Disable. 3. Read the notes below before proceeding. Configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Copy Services Server Menu Change Server Definitions Enter the Primary Server and Backup Server IP Address then enter the requested client Cluster x Hostname and IP Address information. This information is from the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. Notes: a. If the ESS is running at Code level 2.2.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Server and Client Configuration can be entered by the customer using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. However the updates to the Hosts tables (/etc/hosts) in Step 4 must be performed by the Service Representative. b. If the ESS is running at Code level 3.3.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Client Configuration can only be entered using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. 4. Configure the host tables for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Communications Resources Menu Change/Show TCP/IP Configuration Further Configuration
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6
413
Configuration
Name Resolution Host Tables (/etc/hosts) Add a Host From the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet, enter the: - Verify that the local cluster Hostname and IP Address are already there, then enter the Hostname and IP Address for every other ESS cluster in this server group from the Enable Copy Services table - IP Address and Hostname of each Host that uses CLI commands to this server group, from the Enable Copy Services without DNS worksheet - IP Address and Hostname of the ESSNet, from the Enable Copy Services without DNS table Attention: If the current host table needs to be modified, use the Remove a Host option and then the Add a Host option to replace existing information. Using the Change option may result in multiple entries for the same host. Connect the service terminal to the other ESS cluster and repeat step 4 on page 413. Remember, do not include the cluster that you are attached to! 5. Are you configuring copy services on the Primary Server? v Yes, to complete the configuration of copy services on the entire Server Group, this procedure must be performed on the ESS subsystem containing the Backup server (unless the Backup server is on the same ESS subsystem). a. Instruct the customer to verify that the backup server site has: 1) Copies of the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet for this ESS group 2) Microcode at EC F25683 or higher installed 3) A new ESS subsystem needs to be installed or an MES is required to install Copy Services on a currently installed machine b. Instruct the customer to verify that all Host machines have: 1) Updated the Host Tables in the host to include the IP Addresses and Hostnames of all attached ESS clusters and any other hosts in this server group 2) Continue with the next step. v No, continue with the next step. 6. Verify that Copy Services is running and that the configuration is correct. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Utility Menu Show Web Status v On the Primary web server, the status should read: Copy Services Status: Copy Services is running The Local cluster is the Primary Copy Services Server v On the Backup web server, the status should read: Copy Services Status: Copy Services is running
414
Configuration
The Local cluster is the Backup Copy Services Server v If the Web Status doesnt show that copy services is running, ask the customer to restart the Copy Services server.
Maximum LSS for System 390, Max = 16 Maximum LSS for Open Systems, Max = 16 Fibre (Access Any vs. Restricted) AS/400 Serial number usage (Box serial vs. XXX) Fibre Channel Pot Name Usage (WWNN vs. Standard) Sequential Fast Write (True or False) Fast Check 1 Recovery (True or False) Cluster Over-Temp Reporting (True or False) DDM Over-Temp Reporting (True or False) Allow Lower DDM RPM Speeds (True or False) rsCsS390CM (Command line Copy Services) (Enable vs Disable) Web Copy Services Commands (Enable vs Disable) Allow CUIR (Control Unit Initiated Reset), S390 Path management for CC code load (Enable vs Disable) Configure Arrays Across SSA Loops (True or False)
415
Configuration
Note: Some early levels of Master Console code allowed the customer to create new users, and change the passwords. This function was removed.
416
Configuration
7. To increase the priority of a queue entry so that it will be sent sooner, click on the desired entry, and click on the Increase Priority button. Follow the on screen instructions. 8. To delete a queue entry, click on the desired entry, and click on the Delete button. Follow the on screen instructions. 9. To copy the queue entry to a diskette, click on the desired entry, and click on the Offload to Diskette button. Follow the on screen instructions. 10. To offload the queue entry to the MoST or another PC using a serial port, click on the desired entry, and click on the Offload to Serial Port button. Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Click on Refresh to refresh the list of queue entries. Click Close when complete. 12. Click Close when complete.
417
Configuration
418
Configuration
8. Click Close when done.
419
420
Appendix. Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted mobility or limited vision, to use software products successfully.
Features
These are the major accessibility features in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server information: 1. You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what is displayed on the screen. IBM Home Page Reader version 3.0 has been tested. 2. You can operate features using the keyboard instead of the mouse.
Navigating by keyboard
You can use keys or key combinations to perform operations and initiate menu actions that can also be done through mouse actions. You can navigate the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server information from the keyboard by using the shortcut keys for your browser or Home Page Reader. See your browser Help for a list of shortcut keys that it supports. See the following Web site for a list of shortcut keys supported by Home Page Reader:
http://www-306.ibm.com/able/solution_offerings/keyshort.html
You can access the information using IBM Home Page Reader 3.0.
421
422
Index Numerics
2105 124 2105 communications configuration See communications configuration 397 2105 expansion enclosure install certify DDMs 312 check customer preparation 265 check SSA DASD DDM bay indicators 309 checking customer power 273 checking customer power, plug in MPC 276 checking switch settings 298 checking worksheets 264 checks for 2105 expansion enclosure MES 301 complete the installation 310 complete the physical install 309 completing the install 314 customer ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 278 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 290 customer power: plug in or wired 275 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 281 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 284 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 293 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 295 EMEA electrician information 290 entry for EE with 2105 264 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 276 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 287 inspect for ship damage and missing parts 266 install and test 264 install entry for MES 264 install using the service terminal 309 installing 272 logical configuration 314 logically install storage cages and DDM bays 310 position the rack 267, 272 power on and test 305 safety inspection 266 verify ship group is complete 266 2105 expansion enclosure install, check customer preparation 265 2105 expansion enclosure install, checking customer power 273 2105 expansion enclosure install, checking worksheets 264 2105 expansion enclosure install, customer ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 278 2105 expansion enclosure install, customer power: plug in or wired 275 2105 expansion enclosure install, entry for EE with 2105 264 2105 expansion enclosure install, ground continuity check, plug in MPC 276 2105 expansion enclosure install, inspect for ship damage and missing parts 266 2105 expansion enclosure install, install and test 264 2105 expansion enclosure install, install entry for MES 264 2105 expansion enclosure install, installing 272 2105 expansion enclosure install, position the rack 267, 272 2105 expansion enclosure install, safety inspection 266 2105 expansion enclosure install, verify ship group is complete 266 2105 Model 800 duplicating the configuration of a 2105 ESS subsystem 391 tailgate clamp remove/replace 316 test MC configuration and communication status 388 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure FRU replacement procedures 124 2105 model 800 install activate LIC features 249 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 262 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 253 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 258 before you install the 166 begin install of Master Console 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 220 certify DDMs 252 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine 170 check Retain for install tips 171 checking availability of logical configuration 168 checking customer power 177 checking customer power, plug in MPC 179 checking customer power, wired MPC 191, 287 checking customer preparation 171 checking for feature code 0970 177 checking required microcode 169 checking worksheets 168 cluster configuration for customer network 245 complete the physical install 220 completing the installation 251 configure 239 configure call home and remote services 239 configure control switches 243 configure copy services 250 configure customer information 239 configure E-mail 241 configure fibre channel port topology 242 configure Master Console 231
423
2105 model 800 install (continued) configure maximum problem presentation count 239 configure pager users 242 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 239 configure SNMP 242 connect 2105 to MSA 226 connect 2105 to the host system 254 connect and test customer network connection 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 194 customer power: plug in or wired 179 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 199 EMEA electrician information 194 enable or disable ESS Specialist 239 finish the install 259 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 261 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 180 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 191 initial MC network settings 231 inspect for ship damage 173 install and test 162 install required microcode 250 install using the service terminal 218 installation process and checkpoints 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 165 label and route cables 174 logical configuration 257 login Master Console 231 MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC configuration for customer network 244 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 modem install 222 MSA install 225 position the rack 174 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 229 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 226 safety inspection 174 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 SR worksheet fields 169 target time for install phases 164 test customer E-mail and SNMP 248 test modem communications 248 test UEPO and power supplies 305
2105 model 800 install (continued) verify cluster IP address on the MC 246 verify MC network setup 237 verify ship group complete 173 2105 Model 800, discontinuing 386 2105 rack 390 V battery set 135 cable 159 mainline power cable 131 operator panel 139 PPS fan 133 primary power supply (PPS) 125 rack power control card (RPC) 140 RPC power control card 147 RPC switch card (local and remote) 143 storage cage fan (center) 151 storage cage fan (top) 150 storage cage fan/power sense card 157 storage cage power planar 153 storage cage power supply 148 2105 subsystem install activate LIC features 249 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 262 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 253 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 258 before you install the 166 begin install of Master Console 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 220 certify DDMs 252 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine 170 check Retain for install tips 171 checking availability of logical configuration 168 checking customer power 177 checking customer power, plug in MPC 179 checking customer power, wired MPC 191 checking customer preparation 171 checking for feature code 0970 177 checking required microcode 169 checking worksheets 168 cluster configuration for customer network 245 complete the physical install 220 completing the installation 251 configure 239 configure call home and remote services 239 configure control switches 243 configure copy services 250 configure customer information 239 configure E-mail 241 configure fibre channel port topology 242 configure Master Console 231 configure maximum problem presentation count 239 configure pager users 242 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 239 configure SNMP 242 connect 2105 to MSA 226
424
2105 subsystem install (continued) connect and test customer network connection 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 194 customer power: plug in or wired 179 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 199 EMEA electrician information 194 enable or disable ESS Specialist 239 finish the install 259 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 261 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 180 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 191 initial MC network settings 231 inspect for ship damage 173 install and test 162 install required microcode 250 install using the service terminal 218 installation process and checkpoints 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 165 label and route cables 174 logical configuration 257 login Master Console 231 MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC configuration for customer network 244 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 modem install 222 MSA install 225 position the rack 174 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 229 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 226 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 254 safety inspection 174 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 SR worksheet fields 169 target time for install phases 164 test customer E-mail and SNMP 248 test modem communications 248 verify cluster IP address on the MC 246 verify MC network setup 237 verify ship group complete 173 2105, reinstallation 377 2105, relocating 363, 377
A
accessibility 421 activate LIC features 2105 model 800 install 249 activate LIC features 2105 subsystem install 249 activating LIC features 396 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 2105 model 800 install 262 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 2105 subsystem install 262 additional configuration procedures 401 change date, time, and time zone 401 changing TCP/IP configuration (dual cluster) 401 changing TCP/IP configuration (single cluster) 405 control switches, change/show 415 copy services, with DNS 410 copy services, without DNS 412 regenerate ESS specialist certificate 410 updating MC TCP/IP information 409 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 2105 model 800 install 253 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 2105 subsystem install 253
B
background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 2105 model 800 install 258 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 2105 subsystem install 258 backplane removal and replacement, host bay 116 before you install the 2105 model 800 166 before you install the 2105 subsystem 166 begin install of Master Console 2105 model 800 install 221 begin install of Master Console 2105 subsystem install 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 2105 model 800 install 220 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 2105 subsystem install 220 bypass and passthrough card removal and replacement, DDM bay 11
C
cable removal and replacement, CEC drawer 56 cable removal and replacement, I/O drawer 105 cable, 2105 rack 159 call home / remote services configure 397 Canadian compliance statement xx CD-ROM and hard disk drive removal and replacement, CEC drawer 28 CEC drawer cable removal and replacement 56 CD-ROM and hard disk drive removal and replacement 28
Index
425
CEC drawer (continued) CEC drawer power supply removal and replacement 41 fan controller and LED card removal and replacement 53 fan removal and replacement 51 memory DIMM (memory riser card) removal and replacement 48 memory riser card removal and replacement 46 operator pane and EEPROM removal and replacement 26 planar assembly removal and replacement 35 processor card removal and replacement 44 service position 23 top service access 25 CEC drawer FRU repair entry table 1 CEC drawer power supply removal and replacement, CEC drawer 41 certify DDMs 2105 model 800 install 252 certify DDMs 2105 subsystem install 252 certify DDMs, 2105 expansion enclosure install 312 change date, time, and time zone 401 changing customer information 397 chapter 4, FRU removal and replacement procedures 1 chapter 5, install and remove 161 chapter 6, logical configuration of storage facility 395 check customer preparation, 2105 expansion enclosure install 265 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine, 2105 model 800 install 170 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine, 2105 subsystem install 170 check Retain for install tips 2105 model 800 install 171 check Retain for install tips 2105 subsystem install 171 check SSA DASD DDM bay indicators, 2105 expansion enclosure install 309 checking availability of logical configuration 2105 model 800 install 168 checking availability of logical configuration 2105 subsystem install 168 checking customer power 2105 model 800 install 177 checking customer power 2105 subsystem install 177 checking customer power, 2105 expansion enclosure install 273 checking customer power, plug in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 276 checking customer power, plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 179 checking customer power, plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 179 checking customer power, wired MPC, 2105 model 800 install 191, 287 checking customer power, wired MPC, 2105 subsystem install 191 checking customer preparation 2105 model 800 install 171 checking customer preparation 2105 subsystem install 171 checking for feature code 0970 2105 model 800 install 177
checking for feature code 0970 2105 subsystem install 177 checking required microcode 2105 model 800 install 169 checking required microcode 2105 subsystem install 169 checking switch settings 2105 expansion enclosure install 298 checking the items rack 330 checking worksheets 2105 model 800 install 168 checking worksheets 2105 subsystem install 168 checking worksheets, 2105 expansion enclosure install 264 checks for 2105 expansion enclosure MES 2105 expansion enclosure install 301 Chinese EMI statement xxii cluster power off using RPC card switches 20, 61 power off using service terminal 20, 61 power on using RPC card switches 22, 63 power on/off, procedure 20, 61 cluster CEC drawer replacement procedures 20 cluster configuration for customer network 2105 model 800 install 245 cluster configuration for customer network 2105 subsystem install 245 cluster I/O drawer replacement procedures 61 cluster, power off using RPC card switches 20, 61 cluster, power off using service terminal 20, 61 cluster, power on using RPC card switch 22, 63 communications configuration activating LIC features 396 call home / remote services 397 changing customer information 397 configure pager users 399 configure problem presentation count 397 configure SIM reporting (OS 390) 397 control switches, change/show 400 E-mail 398 ESS specialist 400 fibre channel port topology 400 logical configurations 399 SNMP 399 communications configuration, 2105 See communications configuration 397 communications statement xx complete the installation, 2105 expansion enclosure install 310 complete the physical install 2105 expansion enclosure install 309 complete the physical install 2105 model 800 install 220 complete the physical install 2105 subsystem install 220 completing install ESCON channel host card 355, 359 fibre channel host card 355 host card 355 ultra scsi host card 355 completing install of a host card 355
426
completing the install, 2105 expansion enclosure install 314 completing the installation 2105 model 800 install 251 completing the installation 2105 subsystem install 251 compliance statement, radio frequency energy xx compliance statement, Taiwan xxii configuration See logical configuration 395 configuration, additional procedures 401 configuration, change date, time, and time zone 401 configuration, change/show control switches 400 configuration, change/show control switches additional 415 configuration, changing TCP/IP (dual cluster) 401 configuration, changing TCP/IP (single cluster) 405 configuration, communications 397 See communications configuration 397 configuration, logical Seelogical configuration 395 configurations, logical 399 configure call home / remote services 397 configure call home and remote services 2105 model 800 install 239 configure call home and remote services 2105 subsystem install 239 configure control switches 2105 model 800 install 243 configure control switches 2105 subsystem install 243 configure copy services 2105 model 800 install 250 configure copy services 2105 subsystem install 250 configure copy services, with DNS 410 configure copy services, without DNS 412 configure customer information 2105 model 800 install 239 configure customer information 2105 subsystem install 239 configure E-mail 398 configure E-mail 2105 model 800 install 241 configure E-mail 2105 subsystem install 241 configure ESS specialist 400 configure fibre channel port topology 400 configure fibre channel port topology 2105 model 800 install 242 configure fibre channel port topology 2105 subsystem install 242 configure Master Console 2105 model 800 install 231 configure Master Console 2105 subsystem install 231 configure maximum problem presentation count 2105 model 800 install 239 configure maximum problem presentation count 2105 subsystem install 239 configure pager users 399 configure pager users 2105 model 800 install 242 configure pager users 2105 subsystem install 242 configure problem presentation count 397 configure SIM reporting (OS 390) 397 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 2105 model 800 install 239 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 2105 subsystem install 239 configure SNMP 399 configure SNMP 2105 model 800 install 242
configure SNMP 2105 subsystem install 242 configure, 2105 model 800 install 239 configure, 2105 subsystem install 239 connect 2105 to MSA 2105 model 800 install 226 connect 2105 to MSA 2105 subsystem install 226 connect and test customer network connection 2105 model 800 install 247 connect and test customer network connection 2105 subsystem install 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 2105 model 800 install 243 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 2105 subsystem install 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 2105 model 800 install 234 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 2105 subsystem install 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 connecting the DDM bay 339 control switches, change/show configuration 400 control switches, change/show configuration additional 415 controller card removal and replacement, DDM bay 13 copy services, with DNS, configure 410 copy services, without DNS, configure 412 customer ground check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 278 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 290 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 194 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 194 customer information, changing 397 customer power: plug in or wired 2105 model 800 install 179 customer power: plug in or wired 2105 subsystem install 179 customer power: plug in or wired, 2105 expansion enclosure install 275 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 182 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 281 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 284 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 188 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 293
Index
427
customer voltage check with CB off, wired 2105 model 800 install 197 customer voltage check with CB off, wired 2105 subsystem install 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired 2105 expansion enclosure install 295 customer voltage check with CB on, wired 2105 model 800 install 199 customer voltage check with CB on, wired 2105 subsystem install 199
D
date, time, and time zone change 401 DDM bay bypass and passthrough card removal and replacement 11 controller card removal and replacement 13 disk drive module locations 7 disk drive module removal and replacement 7 frame assembly removal and replacement 14 installation 330 installation with fc 0970 with 2105 expansion enclosure 347 installation with fc 0970 with 2105 model 800 343 SSA cable removal and replacement 17 DDM bay FRU repair entry table 1 DDM bay FRU replacement procedures 7 DDM bay SSA cable FRU replacement procedures 17 disability 421 discontinue, 2105 Model 800 discontinuing 386 disk drive module locations, DDM bay 7 disk drive module removal and replacement, DDM bay 7 diskette drive removal and replacement, I/O drawer 67 duplicating the configuration of a 2105 ESS subsystem 391
entry table install activity 161 ESCON and fibre channel wrap tools removal and replacement, host bay 118 ESCON channel host card completing install 355 installation 350 removal 359 ESD attachment of wrist strap 5 electrostatic discharge 4 ESD-sensitive parts, working with 4 grounding locations 4 precautions 5 wrist strap 4 ESD precautions 5 ESS specialist certificate regenerate 410 ESS specialist configure 400 European Community Compliance statement xx
F
fan controller and LED card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 53 fan controller card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 96 fan removal and replacement, CEC drawer 51 FCC (see Federal Communications Commission) xx Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement xx fibre channel host card completing install 355 installation 350 removal 359 fibre channel port topology configure 400 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 2105 model 800 install 261 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 2105 subsystem install 261 finish the install 2105 model 800 install 259 finish the install 2105 subsystem install 259 frame assembly removal and replacement, DDM bay 14 FRU remove and replace 1 FRU removal and replacement procedures 1, 4 FRU replacement replacing a cluster FRU 6 replacing a non-cluster FRU 6 service terminal FRU menu 6
E
E-mail configure 398 electronic emission notices xx electrostatic discharge (ESD) 4 EMEA electrician information 194 EMEA electrician information 2105 expansion enclosure install 290 EMEA electrician information 2105 model 800 install 194 EMEA electrician information 2105 subsystem install 194 EMI statement, Chinese xxii enable disable CUIR 415 enable or disable ESS Specialist 2105 model 800 install 239 enable or disable ESS Specialist 2105 subsystem install 239 entry for EE with 2105, 2105 expansion enclosure install 264 entry for repair 1
G
ground continuity check, enclosure install 276 ground continuity check, install 180 ground continuity check, install 180 ground continuity check, enclosure install 287 plug in MPC, 2105 expansion plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem wired in MPC, 2105 expansion
428
ground continuity check, wired in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 191 ground continuity check, wired in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 191
H
host bay backplane removal and replacement 116 ESCON and fibre channel wrap tools removal and replacement 118 host bay power supply removal and replacement 114 host card removal and replacement 111 planar removal and replacement 120 service position removal and replacement 109 host bay FRU repair entry table 2 host bay power supply removal and replacement, host bay 114 host bay replacement procedures 109 host card completing install 355 installation 350 removal 359 host card removal and replacement, host bay 111 how to attach the ESD wrist strap 5
I
I/O drawer cable removal and replacement 105 diskette drive removal and replacement 67 fan controller card removal and replacement 96 I/O drawer power supply removal and replacement 78 NVS battery assembly removal and replacement 92 NVS battery charger card removal and replacement 88 NVS/IOA card removal and replacement 85 planar assembly removal and replacement 69, 72 RIO card removal and replacement 98 RJ45 card removal and replacement 102 service position 64 SSA device card removal and replacement 81 top service access removal and replacement 66 I/O drawer FRU repair entry table 2 I/O drawer power supply removal and replacement, I/O drawer 78 IBM patents xix products xix programs xix services xix trademarks xxii Industry Canada Compliance statement xx initial MC network settings 2105 model 800 install 231 initial MC network settings 2105 subsystem install 231 inspect for ship damage 2105 model 800 install 173 inspect for ship damage 2105 subsystem install 173 inspect for ship damage and missing parts, 2105 expansion enclosure install 266
install 2105 expansion enclosure 264 certify DDMs 312 check customer preparation 265 check SSA DASD DDM bay indicators 309 checking customer power 273 checking customer power, plug in MPC 276 checking switch settings 298 checking worksheets 264 checks for 2105 expansion enclosure MES 301 complete the installation 310 complete the physical install 309 completing the install 314 customer ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 278 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 290 customer power: plug in or wired 275 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 281 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 284 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 293 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 295 EMEA electrician information 290 entry for EE with 2105 264 entry for MES install 264 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 276 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 287 inspect for ship damage and missing parts 266 install using the service terminal 309 installing 272 logical configuration 314 logically install storage cages and DDM bays 310 position the rack 267, 272 power on and test 305 safety inspection 266 test UEPO and power supplies 305 verify ship group is complete 266 2105 model 800 162 activate LIC features 249 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 262 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 253 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 258 before you install the 166 begin install of Master Console 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 220 certify DDMs 252 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine 170 check Retain for install tips 171 checking availability of logical configuration 168 checking customer power 177
Index
429
install (continued) 2105 model 800 (continued) checking customer power, plug in MPC 179 checking customer power, wired MPC 191, 287 checking customer preparation 171 checking for feature code 0970 177 checking required microcode 169 checking worksheets 168 cluster configuration for customer network 245 complete the physical install 220 completing the installation 251 configure 239 configure call home and remote services 239 configure control switches 243 configure copy services 250 configure customer information 239 configure E-mail 241 configure fibre channel port topology 242 configure Master Console 231 configure maximum problem presentation count 239 configure pager users 242 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 239 configure SNMP 242 connect 2105 to MSA 226 connect and test customer network connection 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 194 customer power: plug in or wired 179 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 199 EMEA electrician information 194 enable or disable ESS Specialist 239 finish the install 259 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 261 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 180 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 191 initial MC network settings 231 inspect for ship damage 173 install required microcode 250 install using the service terminal 218 installation process and checkpoints 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 165 label and route cables 174 logical configuration 257 login Master Console 231
install (continued) 2105 model 800 (continued) MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC configuration for customer network 244 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 modem install 222 MSA install 225 position the rack 174 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 229 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 226 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 254 safety inspection 174 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 SR worksheet fields 169 target time for install phases 164 test customer E-mail and SNMP 248 test modem communications 248 verify cluster IP address on the MC 246 verify MC network setup 237 verify ship group complete 173 2105 subsystem 162 activate LIC features 249 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 262 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 253 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 258 before you install the 166 begin install of Master Console 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 220 certify DDMs 252 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine 170 check Retain for install tips 171 checking availability of logical configuration 168 checking customer power 177 checking customer power, plug in MPC 179 checking customer power, wired MPC 191 checking customer preparation 171 checking for feature code 0970 177 checking required microcode 169 checking worksheets 168 cluster configuration for customer network 245 complete the physical install 220 completing the installation 251 configure 239 configure call home and remote services 239 configure control switches 243 configure copy services 250 configure customer information 239 configure E-mail 241 configure fibre channel port topology 242 configure Master Console 231
430
install (continued) 2105 subsystem (continued) configure maximum problem presentation count 239 configure pager users 242 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 239 configure SNMP 242 connect 2105 to MSA 226 connect and test customer network connection 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 194 customer power: plug in or wired 179 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 199 EMEA electrician information 194 enable or disable ESS Specialist 239 finish the install 259 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 261 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 180 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 191 initial MC network settings 231 inspect for ship damage 173 install required microcode 250 install using the service terminal 218 installation preparations 166 installation process and checkpoints 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 165 label and route cables 174 logical configuration 257 login Master Console 231 MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC configuration for customer network 244 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 modem install 222 MSA install 225 position the rack 174 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 229 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 226 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 254 safety inspection 174 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 SR worksheet fields 169
install (continued) 2105 subsystem (continued) target time for install phases 164 test customer E-mail and SNMP 248 test modem communications 248 verify cluster IP address on the MC 246 verify MC network setup 237 verify ship group complete 173 install activity entry table 161 install and remove 161 install and test 2105 model 800 162 install and test 2105 subsystem 162 install and test, 2105 expansion enclosure install 264 install entry for MES, 2105 expansion enclosure install 264 install required microcode 2105 model 800 install 250 install required microcode 2105 subsystem install 250 install using the service terminal 2105 model 800 install 218 install using the service terminal 2105 subsystem install 218 install using the service terminal, 2105 expansion enclosure install 309 install, completing host card 355 install, host card 350 completing installation 355 installation DDM bay with 2105 model 800 330 DDM bay with fc 0970 with 2105 expansion enclosure 347 DDM bay with fc 0970 with 2105 model 800 343 ESCON channel host card 350 fibre channel host card 350 host card 350 ultra scsi host card 350 installation and testing instructions connecting the DDM bay 339 rack checking the items 330 preparing the rack 331 installation process and checkpoints 2105 model 800 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 2105 model 800 165 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 2105 subsystem 165 installation, 2105 expansion enclosure position for install 272 installation, 2105 Expansion Enclosure position for install 267 installation, 2105 Model 800 duplicating the configuration of a 2105 ESS subsystem 391 primary power supply checks 202 rack operator panel 207 switches 207 tailgate clamp, installation/removal 316 tailgate hardware removal 316 test MC configuration and communication status 388
Index
431
installation, SSA DASD DDM bay using service terminal 336 installing a host card 350 installing SSA DASD DDM bay using service terminal 336 installing, 2105 expansion enclosure install 272
logically install storage cages and DDM bays, 2105 expansion enclosure install 310 login Master Console 2105 model 800 install 231 login Master Console 2105 subsystem install 231
M
mainline power cable, 2105 rack 131 manuals, related xxvii master console (MC) connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 initial MC network settings 231 MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 test MC configuration and communication status 388 verify MC network setup 237 MC backup and restore configuration data 2105 model 800 install 238 MC backup and restore configuration data 2105 subsystem install 238 MC call home settings 2105 model 800 install 232 MC call home settings 2105 subsystem install 232 MC configuration for customer network 2105 model 800 install 244 MC configuration for customer network 2105 subsystem install 244 MC date and time settings 2105 model 800 install 231 MC date and time settings 2105 subsystem install 231 MC remote service settings 2105 model 800 install 232 MC remote service settings 2105 subsystem install 232 MC TCP/IP information update 409 memory DIMM (memory riser card) removal and replacement, CEC drawer 48 memory riser card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 46 MOC (see Korean Government Ministry of Communication) xxi modem install 2105 model 800 install 222 modem install 2105 subsystem install 222 MSA install 2105 model 800 install 225 MSA install 2105 subsystem install 225
J
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) class A statement xxi
K
Korean Government Ministry of Communication (MOC) statement xxi
L
label and route cables 2105 model 800 install 174 label and route cables 2105 subsystem install 174 LIC features, activating 396 logical configuration 2105 communications 397 additional configuration procedures 401 change date, time, and time zone 401 changing TCP/IP configuration (dual cluster) 401 changing TCP/IP configuration (single cluster) 405 control switches, change/show 415 copy services, with DNS 410 copy services, without DNS 412 regenerate ESS specialist certificate 410 updating MC TCP/IP information 409 communications configuration activating LIC features 396 call home / remote services 397 changing customer information 397 configure pager users 399 configure problem presentation count 397 configure SIM reporting (OS 390) 397 control switches, change/show 400 E-mail 398 ESS specialist 400 fibre channel port topology 400 logical configurations 399 SNMP 399 enable disable CUIR 415 pre-installation communication resource worksheet fields 396 pre-installation configuration worksheet overview 395 pre-installation worksheets 395 storage facility 395 logical configuration 2105 expansion enclosure install 314 logical configuration 2105 model 800 install 257 logical configuration 2105 subsystem install 257 logical configuration of storage facility 395 logical configurations 399
N
notices laser safety xix safety xix notices, electronic emission xx NVS battery assembly removal and replacement, I/O drawer 92 NVS battery charger card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 88 NVS/IOA card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 85
432
O
operator pane and EEPROM removal and replacement, CEC drawer 26 operator panel, 2105 rack 139 ordering publications xxvii overview of repair chapter 4
P
pager users configure 399 patent licenses xix planar assembly removal and replacement, CEC drawer 35 planar assembly removal and replacement, I/O drawer 69, 72 planar removal and replacement, host bay 120 position the rack 2105 model 800 install 174 position the rack 2105 subsystem install 174 position the rack, 2105 expansion enclosure install 267, 272 power control 2105 subsystem 124 cluster 20, 61 power off cluster, using RPC card switches 20, 61 cluster, using service terminal 20, 61 power off using RPC card switches, cluster 20, 61 power off using service terminal, cluster 20 power off using service terminalf, cluster 61 power on cluster, using RPC card switch 22, 63 power on and test 2105 expansion enclosure install 305 power on using RPC card switch, cluster 22, 63 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 2105 model 800 install 229 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 2105 subsystem install 229 power on/off procedure 124 power on/off, cluster 20, 61 PPS fan, 2105 rack 133 pre-installation communication resource worksheet fields 396 pre-installation configuration worksheet overview 395 pre-installation configuration worksheets 395 communication resource worksheet fields 396 overview 395 primary power supply (PPS), 2105 rack 125 problem presentation count, configure 397 processor card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 44 products xix programs xix publications, ordering xxvii
R
rack FRU repair entry table 2 rack power control card (RPC), 2105 rack 140 rack, preparing 331
radio-frequency energy compliance statement xx regenerate ESS specialist certificate 410 reinstalling with relocation 377 related manuals xxvii relocating, 2105 reinstallation 377 relocating 363 removal fibre channel host card 359 host card 359 ultra scsi host card 359 remove and replace, 2105 rack 390 V battery set 135 cable 159 mainline power cable 131 operator panel 139 PPS fan 133 primary power supply (PPS) 125 rack power control card (RPC) 140 RPC power control card 147 RPC switch card (local and remote) 143 storage cage fan (center) 151 storage cage fan (top) 150 storage cage fan/power sense card 157 storage cage power planar 153 storage cage power supply 148 remove and replace, CEC drawer cable 56 CD-ROM and hard disk drive 28 CEC drawer power supply 41 fan 51 fan controller and LED card 53 memory DIMM (memory riser card) 48 memory riser card 46 operator pane and EEPROM 26 planar assembly 35 processor card 44 service position 23 top service access 25 remove and replace, DDM bay bypass and passthrough card 11 controller card 13 DDM 7 disk drive module 7 frame assembly 14 SSA cable 17 remove and replace, host bay backplane 116 ESCON and fibre channel wrap tools 118 host bay power supply 114 host card 111 planar 120 service position 109 remove and replace, I/O drawer cable 105 diskette drive 67 fan controller card 96 I/O drawer power supply 78 NVS battery assembly 92 NVS battery charger card 88 NVS/IOA card 85
Index
433
remove and replace, I/O drawer (continued) planar assembly 69, 72 RIO card 98 RJ45 card 102 service position 64 SSA device card 81 top service access 66 remove, host card 359 remove/replace, 2105 Model 800 tailgate clamps 316 remove/replace, 2105 subsystem 2105 subsystem power on/off 124 remove/replace, cluster cluster power on/off 20, 61 removing a host card 359 repair 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure FRU replacement procedures 124 390 V battery set, 2105 rack 135 backplane removal and replacement, host bay 116 bypass and passthrough card removal and replacement, DDM bay 11 cable removal and replacement, CEC drawer 56 cable removal and replacement, I/O drawer 105 cable, 2105 rack 159 CD-ROM and hard disk drive removal and replacement, CEC drawer 28 CEC drawer power supply removal and replacement, CEC drawer 41 cluster CEC drawer replacement procedures 20 cluster I/O drawer replacement procedures 61 controller card removal and replacement, DDM bay 13 DDM bay FRU replacement procedures 7 DDM bay SSA cable FRU replacement procedures 17 disk drive module locations, DDM bay 7 disk drive module removal and replacement, DDM bay 7 diskette drive removal and replacement, I/O drawer 67 entry for repair 1 entry tables 1 entry tables, CEC drawer 1 entry tables, DDM bay 1 entry tables, host bay 2 entry tables, I/O drawer 2 entry tables, rack 2 ESCON and fibre channel wrap tools removal and replacement, host bay 118 ESD precautions 5 fan controller and LED card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 53 fan controller card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 96 fan removal and replacement, CEC drawer 51 frame assembly removal and replacement, DDM bay 14 FRU removal and replacement procedures 4 host bay power supply removal and replacement, host bay 114 host bay replacement procedures 109
repair (continued) host card removal and replacement, host bay 111 how to attach the ESD wrist strap 5 I/O drawer power supply removal and replacement, I/O drawer 78 mainline power cable, 2105 rack 131 memory DIMM (memory riser card) removal and replacement, CEC drawer 48 memory riser card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 46 NVS battery assembly removal and replacement, I/O drawer 92 NVS battery charger card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 88 NVS/IOA card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 85 operator pane and EEPROM removal and replacement, CEC drawer 26 operator panel, 2105 rack 139 overview of repair chapter 4 planar assembly removal and replacement, CEC drawer 35 planar assembly removal and replacement, I/O drawer 69, 72 planar removal and replacement, host bay 120 PPS fan, 2105 rack 133 primary power supply (PPS), 2105 rack 125 processor card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 44 rack power control card (RPC), 2105 rack 140 replace a cluster FRU 6 replace a FRU using the service terminal 6 replacing a non-cluster FRU 6 RIO card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 98 RJ45 card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 102 RPC power control card, 2105 rack 147 RPC switch card (local and remote), 2105 rack 143 service position removal and replacement, host bay 109 service position, CEC drawer 23 service position, I/O drawer 64 SSA cable removal and replacement, DDM bay 17 SSA device card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 81 standard tools needed for FRU replacement 4 storage cage fan (center), 2105 rack 151 storage cage fan (top), 2105 rack 150 storage cage fan/power sense card, 2105 rack 157 storage cage power planar, 2105 rack 153 storage cage power supply, 2105 rack 148 top service access removal and replacement, I/O drawer 66 top service access, CEC drawer 25 using the repair chapter 4 working with ESD sensitive parts 4 replace a cluster FRU 6 replace a FRU using the service terminal 6 replace FRUs 1 replacing a non-cluster FRU 6 RIO card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 98
434
RJ45 card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 102 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 2105 model 800 install 226 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 2105 subsystem install 226 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 2105 model 800 install 254 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 2105 subsystem install 254 RPC power control card, 2105 rack 147 RPC switch card (local and remote), 2105 rack 143
T
tailgate cable clamps, 2105 Model 800 install 316 remove 316 tailgate hardware, remove/install removal, 2105 Model 800 316 Taiwan compliance statement xxii target time for install phases 2105 model 800 164 TCP/IP configuration change (dual cluster) 401 TCP/IP configuration change (single cluster) 405 test customer E-mail and SNMP 2105 model 800 install 248 test customer E-mail and SNMP 2105 subsystem install 248 test MC configuration and communication status 388 test modem communications 2105 model 800 install 248 test modem communications 2105 subsystem install 248 test UEPO and power supplies 2105 expansion enclosure install 305 tools needed for FRU replacement 4 top service access removal and replacement, I/O drawer 66 top service access, CEC drawer 25 trademarks xxii
S
safety inspection 2105 model 800 install 174 safety inspection 2105 subsystem install 174 safety inspection, 2105 expansion enclosure install 266 safety notices attention xix caution xix danger xix laser xix notices xix translations of xix serial port configure MC to cluster 2105 model 800 install 233 serial port configure MC to cluster 2105 subsystem install 233 service position removal and replacement, host bay 109 service position, CEC drawer 23 service position, I/O drawer 64 services xix SIM reporting (OS 390), change 397 SNMP configure 399 SR worksheet fields 2105 model 800 install 169 SR worksheet fields 2105 subsystem install 169 SSA cable removal and replacement, DDM bay 17 SSA device card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 81 standard tools needed for FRU replacement 4 statement of compliance European Community Compliance xx Federal Communications Commission xx Industry Canada Compliance xx Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) xxi Korean Government Ministry of Communication (MOC) xxi Taiwan xxii statement of EMI Chinese xxii storage cage fan (center), 2105 rack 151 storage cage fan (top), 2105 rack 150 storage cage fan/power sense card, 2105 rack 157 storage cage power planar, 2105 rack 153 storage cage power supply, 2105 rack 148 storage facility logical configuration 395
U
ultra SCSI host card completing install 355 installation 350 removal 359 updating MC TCP/IP information 409 using the repair chapter 4
V
VCCI (see Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference) xxi verify cluster IP address on the MC 2105 model 800 install 246 verify cluster IP address on the MC 2105 subsystem install 246 verify MC network setup 2105 model 800 install 237 verify MC network setup 2105 subsystem install 237 verify ship group complete 2105 model 800 install 173 verify ship group complete 2105 subsystem install 173 verify ship group is complete, 2105 expansion enclosure install 266
W
working with ESD sensitive parts 4 worksheet fields pre-installation communication resource worksheet fields 396 worksheets pre-installation communication resource worksheet fields 396
Index
435
436
Overall satisfaction
How satisfied are you that the information in this book is: Very Satisfied h h h h h h Satisfied h h h h h h Neutral h h h h h h Dissatisfied h h h h h h Very Dissatisfied h h h h h h
Accurate Complete Easy to find Easy to understand Well organized Applicable to your tasks
h Yes
h No
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Address
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Fold and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold and_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please _ _ _ _ _ staple _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Tape _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Tape _ _ _ _ do not _ _ _ _ NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES
IBM Information Development Department 61C 9000 South Rita Road Tucson, Arizona U.S.A. 85775-4401
_________________________________________________________________________________________ Please do not staple Fold and Tape Fold and Tape
SY27-7636-05
SY27-7636-05
Spine information: